Home

R&S FSW GSM Application User Manual

1. Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measure
2. 394 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This GSM Measurements User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the GSM Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application GSM UO Measurement Results Details on supported measurements and their result types Basics on GSM Measurements Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration and Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command UO Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw UO measurement data How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup e Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Remote commands required to configure
3. 123 Sample rate The sample rate for UO data acquisition is indicated for reference only It is a fixed value depending on the frequency range to be measured see also chapter 6 3 7 2 Spectrum on page 133 Remote command TRACe IQ SRATe on page 246 Analysis Bandwidth The analysis bandwidth is indicated for reference only It defines the flat usable band width of the final UO data This value is dependent on the Frequency list and the defined signal source The following rule applies analysis bandwidth 0 8 sample rate Note MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restric ted to an input sample rate of 200 MHz Remote command TRACe IQ BWIDth on page 247 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Capture Time Specifies the duration and therefore the amount of data to be captured in the capture buffer The capture time can be defined automatically or manually If Auto mode is enabled the optimal capture time is determined according to the Sam ple rate and Analysis Bandwidth In Manual mode be sure to define a sufficiently long capture time If the capture time is too short demodulation will fail Note The duration of one GSM slot equals 15 26 ms 0 576923 ms The duration of one GSM frame 8 slots equals 60 13 ms 4 615384 ms Tip In order to improve the measurement speed further by using short capture times consider the followi
4. CONFigure MS BSTHreshold GONFigureE MSI CHANnel FRAMe EQlUAal uta rrr ert eren ntt re tnt eren 208 GONFigure MS CHANnelMSLots MEASUre ea conor erre ttr riae rr tena rk ach crore a oaa 253 CONFigure MSICHANneEMSbEots NOF Slots oraret ten terrre nbn ne htt n tn tpa PENE OE 253 CONFigureEMSI CHANnelMSLots OFF Sel ott rrt enana rer tcn TY erra 253 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT N mber FILTer iuuaen oorr ttn rrt nnne nk een turn 209 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number MT YP certet n rrt eene eene 210 CONFigure MS CHANnelSLOT lt Number gt ADVANGE nen rennen 213 CONFigure MS CHANnel SEOT sN mber T dl 215 CONFigure MS CHANnel SEOT Number S TATe tne tnn retentu entr 210 GONFigureEMSI CHANnel SEOT s SCPit ntt nter tree nea otn th taco erri o hn i rens 211 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt T 212 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC USER essen 212 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC sch CONFigureE MS E CEIAANneESEOTSSss TSC USER corro nete rre ten E TAERE reet tea CONEigure MS DEMOd DEGISIOR oett rt rtr tr er nne Ernte n tr etre rte EE e e UE RENERT OK HA RTE EE le EE MS DEV CE d E EONFIouretMSI MAR ter AG TOAEFTIGrS coetu retener t onn n net in enn tener eere GONFigureEMSI MCARrieEBTSCIAsS tueo erae hr rrr tere nean rec Enn RR
5. 351 STATus QUEStionable ACPLEimit CONDITOR cct tte tte ett rte ne eet ta oerte 352 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENAble nennen ennt nnne eret neret STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition STATus QUEStionable AGPLIMIEPT RAansitiOMs roii oio o dain eet exe eec Eee ect rt e EYE EH REO STATus QUEStionable ACL Im EVEN 352 STATus QUEStionable CONDIIOR crecer reete ee etre cetero tp ee Pe eds 352 STAT s QUEStionable DIQ GONDILOn erri rtt rte tenter er erre e en ree e Ere ED 349 STATusOUEGtonable DiO COhNDitton tenente enne enne nnne nitet nsns 352 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABIG rrr Htec tH tp ture cer agp eere e x e NA STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition STATus QUESItionable DIO EVENt cio ret rere ntn eere t nr E Xp I PETERS 350 STAT s QUEStionable DIO EVENIt iii roit trei reo etra ree rt een oec erre rr repe e e iN 352 STATuS QUESUonable ENABIG x core deeg Eege e 352 STATus QUEStionable LIMit sh CONDON aising eerte cte tp etat ee Peas 352 HR Re lee ER e E STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition STAT s QUEStionable EIMitsns EVENt c i b Waianae aula nis eb iret rei eer 352 E AT elle MN E Le EE 353 STATus QUEStionable P 1 RarisitiOri 2 rro rer reiner rtr e te re n enda 353 STAT s QUEStionable S d Tee TR TE KEEN 352 STATus
6. Use Gaussian PvT filter with 500 kHz for single carrier BTS Programming Examples CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer G500 Align the limit line to mid of TSC for each slot CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign PSL pe Spectrum Measurement settings Absolute power and limit remote results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Use compact version of narrow frequency list to save time CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect NSParse 9 Performing the Measurements INITiate IMMediate WAI Read trace data in binary format FORMat DATA REAL 32 Query current magnitude capture trace data TRACe1 DATA TRACe1 trace data Query the current power vs time trace TRACe2 DATA TRACe4 trace data Query the result of the power vs time limit check for max trace CALCulate2 LIMitl FAIL 1 Query max EVM trace data TRACe5 DATA TRACe2 trace data Query the maximum EVM value for slot 1 slot to measure in current measurement FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURR gt 0 62063819169998169 Query the maximum EVM value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 measured GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAX 0 76938760280609131 Query the averaged EVM RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 measured GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage
7. Suffix Value range Description m 1 4 Marker n 1 16 Window lt s gt 0 7 Slot t 1 4 Trace 11 3 Activating GSM Measurements GSM measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW A measurement is started immediately with the default settings INS Timeo Bate DUPLICIS ccs 1 eere peser A EE 198 EEN Titel E EE 198 INSTrument CREate REPLACE ccccceccceeeceececeueeeeeeceueesueeeeueaueeeeeeaueeceauaueeeesaauueeeeeaans 198 Activating GSM Measurements INS TramenbDELele c iau eee Dane ct terat oar udo pedea Te eade EEN 199 INSTrument LIS T2 nit E E Ene ora n Re RR In DE cess Ne TR REOR eR aban taleccasies 199 kee Beni 200 EN Tote E D eite treo ce ee cenae oe xard T AA AEREA BERE VERRE 201 SYS Tem PRESet CHANnsI EXECUte 2 1e rera tic coupes a aee 2 FREE A EEN 201 SYSTem SEQUENCE EE 201 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer gt IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named IQAnalyzer and cre
8. 7 Li About this Manual 5 oic iieri innen i innu etus inns aine rra asi SANESA Pann nauis 7 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeeeee eene eene nnn nnne nennen nan nennen nnn nnns 7 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene enn 9 2 Welcome to the GSM Application uuuuss 11 2 4 Starting the GSM Application eeeeeseessseseeesseeseeseeee enne En 11 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eeeeeeeeeeennnnennn 12 3 About the Measurement eee 16 4 Measurements and Result Displays eeeeeeee 17 4 31 GSM VQ Measurement Results eese eene nennen nennen nn 17 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements eene enn 34 5 Basics on GSM Measurements eee eere 46 5 1 Relevant Digital Standards esee nennen nennen nnn 46 5 2 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution 46 5 3 Short Introduction to VAMOS eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenne nennen nennen nnn 50 5 4 AQPSK Modulatlon rete EEEN EEEE 51 5 5 Triggersettings rennen EPIRI 52 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement eese nennen 53 5 7 Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM
9. iieeeeeeeasee sahen nnn had 308 FETCh BURSI MAGCuracy BPOWer SDEWViation cesse iiini sanant aud cd 308 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOVWer AVERage nennen ener 308 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOVWer CUpRbent eee tenen enne 308 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOVWer MAXIMUM nennen nennen nne 308 READ BURSIt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation esses 308 FETOCHBURGOCMACCuracevltEVMIDEAK AVEHRage rer erererererererereree 308 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURREN1 2 cccceeseseseeeeeneeeeeeeecenaeeeaneea 308 FETCHBURGOC MAC Curacvlt EVMIDEAK MANImum n 308 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIDEAkK GDtEViaton seen 308 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIDEAK AVERage nnne 308 DEADBURSEMACCuracNltEVMIEPEAK CUbbeng tette 308 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum esses 308 READ BURG MAC CuracvllEVMIDEAkK GDEViaton eene 308 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage csset nnn 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVMERMS CURRent ciini iesiiceieees essendo ed ada aede 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum esses 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation eeciseeseiesseeeee nean nnns 309 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage sse 309 READ BURSIt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent essere 309 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXIMUM nennen 309 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIRMS GDEViaton sese 309 FETCh
10. MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Example See chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus 11 10 1 Status Reporting System The GSM application uses the standard status regist
11. ssss 290 MSRA Gs undici eene ens 123 245 ANALYSIS l NE arceri cas erre rrr ere rt ener ia s 83 Configuration MSRA remote sssssss 290 AQPSK es nre etie ee 50 51 378 Constellation diagram case cec 52 Dire V E o ERR Dc 98 AREGCN ciini come ree ret 47 110 232 378 GSM staridard c rr rms 48 Attenuation AUTO iiec Configuration remote lettre essen eeren e e aS 113 152 EI 113 152 Mechanical Eug EE 113 152 Option be Protective remote ae com etenim 219 Auto frame configuration Ee m 264 Auto frequency SORKEY EE Auto level tp ee cit creat dee Reference level E lec M Ce ET EC Auto track time Remote en e RE Auto trigger offset Automatic Config ratiOM EE Configuration remote eiai 264 Band class FRE une 204 205 Bandwidth AI CIIM EEE 122 Coverage MSRA mode sss 83 Bins NEE egesseusieedte ege hee ege ege EN RE Multicarrier fier Multiple carriers Single carrier filter Burst Access AB Configuration Higher symbol rate Normal symbol rate ssssssssss 96 97 98 99 Position within slot esssssseseeeeneees 98 Synchronization 129 Timing Advance 5 99 TYPO ES sit Type dependency 59 MSESIOU M eege reese Dee 54 C Capture buffer Result display RB IRE OE 19 Capture offset MSRA applications essssseee
12. Equal Timeslot Length Errors CAUSCS MES Device connections xe jc Magnitude result display sesseees 20 Modulation result display Solutions ee 191 UE DEE eege eenegen Se sde 191 Status DUS ceci deeg 346 347 Evaluation methods MEWN E 35 Ee EE 275 Trace data it toe tet eite een 299 EVM Evaluation method zag 19 Multiple carriers Results remote Single Cartier 3 55 5 atr ta entire satan e ree Mea Statistic COUNT i i cere rop E ec RE Cnt Troubleshooting VS TMG eR Exporting VQ date ies acne UO data remote SONKEY iac aede trot Peace id een Etuien eege Level remiote teeth eet Files Format VQ data n etre etre cectet 379 UO data binary XML m VQ parameter XML iere te 380 Filters sEc 134 Dependency eoe trt tne rare eis 59 High pass remote iiss aee 220 High pass RF input eere 103 147 Measurement ssssssiniineseesiinnseneee 56 58 98 209 Measurement magnitude response 59 Modulation Spectrum sees 134 Multicarrier OVEIVIEW M M xINT EEN PvT frequency response 257 PYT Re 57 Resolution Spectrum results 134 Signal E rcnt eet ett tenen 56 Transient Spectrum 134 YIG remote EE 221
13. Time Reduced Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Amplitude Narrow Pulse 1 7 Wide Pulse Amplitude normalized e e Time Reduced Symbol Periods Fig 5 14 EDGE Evolution transmit pulses top and the first transmitted symbols bottom 5 10 Synchronization In order to detect and distinguish the individual slots and frames in the measured sig nal the known signal sequence Sync or TSC must be found in each frame Synchronization The synchronization process in the R amp S FSW GSM application depends on how or if the measurement is triggered Synchronization process for power trigger or free run mode If a power trigger or no trigger is used free run mode the synchronization process consists of the following steps 1 Beginning at the start of a capture the application searches for the synchronization pattern or TSC of the Slot to Measure within one GSM frame length This search must be performed over the entire area as the time of occurrance of the TSC within the signal is not known Thus it is referred to as a wide search 2 Once the synchronization point has been found the application checks whether enough samples remain in the capture buffer in order to analyze another frame If so the process continues with the next step Otherwise a new capture is started and the process begins with step 1 again 3 Assuming the signal is periodic the synchronization point in the signal is move
14. if the status bit Z9 in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error o Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Thus may have occurred in any of the channel specific STATus QUEStionable LIMit registers In this case you must check the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result nel name for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other chan as a query parameter Table 11 8 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Bit No Meaning 0 For PvT Modulation and Transient measurement results indicates the upper limit check result pass failure For MCWN Spectrum measurement result wideband noise limit line check including excep tions if activated For PvT measurement result indicates the lower limit check result pass failure For MCWN Spectrum measurement result IM 100 kHz limit line including exceptions if activa ted For MCWN Spectrum measurement result IM 300 kHz limit line For MCWN Spectrum measurement result Narrowband Noise limit line For MCWN Spectrum measurement result Exception Range A only FAIL result no limit line For MCWN Spectrum measurement result Exception Range B only FAIL result no limit line User Manual 1173 9263 02 SF 347 Status Rep
15. If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 105 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 105 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 1 UV to 7 071 V RST 1V 11 5 2 3 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 105 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT lt Unit gt Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 105 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameter
16. Define an average count of 200 SENS SWE COUN 200 Determine wideband noise narrowband noise and intermodulation products of orders 3 and 5 CONF SPEC NWID ON CONF SPEC NNAR ON CONF SPEC IMP 3 5 Apply exceptions to limit check CONF SPEC LIM EXC ON Activate the following result displays 1 Spectrum graph default top 2 Inner IM Table replaces Carrier Power table 3 Outer IM Table bottom 4 Outer narrow band table bottom left 5 Outer wide band table bottom right LAYout REPL WINDow 2 IIMP LAYout ADD WINDow 2 BEL OIMP LAYout ADD WINDow 3 BEL ONAR LAYout ADD WINDow 4 RIGH OWID Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI Query trace data for Spectrum graph TRAC1 DATA TRACE1 Query intermodulation results Programming Examples FETC WSP IMPR INN FETC WSP IMPR OUT Query outer narrowband table results and outer wideband table results FETC WSP NARR OUT FETC WSP WID OUT Query wideband noise limit line including exceptions x values CALC1 LIM1 CONT DATA y values CALC1 LIM1 UPP DATA Query limit line trace values for intermodulation measured with 100 kHZ RBW x values CALC1 LIM2 CONT DATA y values CALC1 LIM2 UPP DATA Query limit line trace values for intermodulation measured with 300 kHZ RBW x values CALC1 LIM3 CONT DATA y values CALC1 LIM
17. 2 iere ae e Eua ides nope e Tex Pre XE RR ITE ss 325 ele LEE 327 e Limit Check Results 328 s MOWN IU 332 e Retrieving Marker Results iet eei te eee rc e 342 Graphical Results The results of the trace queries depend on the selected evaluation see chapter 11 8 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 299 FORMAT DATA ee debetis sette che d asse edhe dr d Detto iud 295 FORMAEDEXPoOItDSEPOLFator 5 3 1 rti re Rennen EEN 296 BENSe JICEFE TENGO itcr abr nrbt rta GER Ran d abad ra etut 296 TRAE GP DATA au edocet dira at pe ton db e E 297 TRACe n DATA X ettet tet tati ttt tette datana akr nitanna tat da tat taa 297 TRAGGIQIDATA MEMOTVD EEN 298 FORMat DATA Format This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Retrieving Results Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters Format ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for t
18. Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Fre 167 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 167 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq This function adjusts the center frequency and ARFCN I Q mode only automatically For multicarrier measurements all carrier settings are automatically adjusted see chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 This command is not available when using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Carriers are only detected in a range of approximately 25 MHz to 2 GHz For further details see chapter 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection on page 82 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 266 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In o
19. Device Band Device type and frequency band used by the DUT as defined in the Signal Description settings Slot Scope Minimized visualization of the frame configuration and slots to be mea sured see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode Count Number of frames already evaluated Total number of frames required for statistical evaluation Statistic Count For Statistic Count gt 1 TRG Trigger source if not Free Run and used trigger bandwidth for IF RF IP power triggers or trigger offset for external triggers MCWN measurement For the MCWN measurement the R amp S FSW shows the following settings MultiView Spectrum GSM Ref Level if Device Band Att i jt Carners Ref Meas t Count 620 200 Table 2 2 Information displayed in the channel bar in the GSM application for the MCWN measure ment Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset if available Carriers Number of active carriers Device Band Device type and frequency band used by the DUT as defined in the Signal Description settings Ref Meas Carrier used for reference measurement if enabled SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode Count Value of the current average count Total average count for noise mea surement Noise Average Count TRG Trigger source if not Free R
20. INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the format of the input signal Parameters lt DataType gt Example Manual operation IQ 1 Q IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ INP IQ TYPE Q See 1 Q Mode on page 106 CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe State Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Parameters State Example Manual operation ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The high accuracy timing function is switched on The cable for high accuracy timing must be connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 OFF 0 The high accuracy timing function is switched off RST OFF CAL AIQ HAT STAT ON See High Accuracy Timi
21. Result 110 ON OFF Result of the limit check 1 ON Pass 0 OFF Fail Example FETC SPEC MOD LIM FAIL Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Graph on page 36 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts INNer ALL This command queries the results of the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified using CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder for the frequencies in the gap between the GSM carrier subblocks for non contiguous carrier allocation For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of intermodulation Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which intermodu lation power is measured Default unit Hz lt IMOrder gt 315 35 Order of the intermodulation 3 IM order 3 5 IM order 5 35 IM orders 3 and 5 lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz Retrieving Results Power numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at IM frequency Default unit dBm dB Limit numeric value absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Determines whether absolute or relative p
22. T GSM 810 H GSM 850 I Frequency Band P GSM 900 H L OIL T E GSM 900 R GSM 900 Fr T GSM 900 H DCS 1800 HI PCS 1900 n Fig 5 1 The frequencies specified in the GSM standard Table 5 2 Frequencies and channel numbers ARFCN in the GSM standard Band Class UL Freq DL Freq Freq Band UL DL Shift ARFCN MHz MHz Middle Lower Upper Lower Upper UL DL Range 1 Range 2 T GSM 380 380 2 389 8 390 2 399 8 385 0 395 0 10 MHz 0 48 T GSM 410 410 2 419 8 420 2 429 8 415 0 425 0 10 MHz 0 48 GSM 450 450 4 457 6 460 4 467 6 454 0 464 0 10 MHz 259 293 GSM 480 478 8 486 0 488 8 496 0 482 4 492 4 10 MHz 306 340 GSM 710 698 0 716 0 728 0 746 0 707 0 737 0 30 MHz 0 90 GSM 750 747 0 762 0 777 0 792 0 754 5 784 5 30 MHz 438 511 T GSM 810 806 0 821 0 851 0 866 0 813 5 858 5 45 MHz 0 75 GSM 850 824 0 849 0 869 0 894 0 836 5 8815 45 MHz 128 251 P GSM 900 890 0 915 0 935 0 960 0 902 5 947 5 45 MHz 1 124 E GSM 900 880 0 915 0 925 0 960 0 897 5 942 5 45 MHz 0 124 975 1023 R GSM 900 876 0 915 0 921 0 960 0 895 5 940 5 45 MHz 0 124 955 1023 T GSM 900 870 4 876 0 915 4 921 0 873 2 918 2 45 MHz 0 281 DCS 1800 1710 0 1785 0 1805 0 1880 0 1747 5 1842 5 95 MHz 512 885 PCS 190
23. wi ife ci Remote commands Basics on syntax Boolean values niteat Gapitalizaltlol iot er neret teri Character data Ju Dataiblocks eegene eode nip niu N tneric Values oerte reset ett Optional keywords D lei EE ul Mm Duc d Resetting RF input protection eerie ette eene 219 Restoring Channel settings irent tn tette Result displays 5 re eerte eo hte Carrier Power Table Constellation 5o roto tee etre ee Default S EVM Inner IM Table eieiei leese Inner Narrow Band Table ssssnneeeeeeeseesensseresseeesee 40 Inner Spectrum Table Magnitude Capture 5 nenne Magnitude Enron tret ette certes Marker table MOWN Spectrum Graph enne en 36 Modulation Accuracy see 21 Modulation Spectrum Graph ou eee eect eee eee 23 Modulation Spectrum Table 24 Outer IM Table iesen mter tnmen 38 Outer Spectrum Table 40 43 Phase Error ariris aai evidi ivin 26 PowWer vs SlOt i e eene Edge 27 PVT Full Burst 2 28 see also Evaluation methods r4 Transient Spectrum Graph sesssssss 30 Transient Spectrum Table AA 31 Trigger to Sync Graph i 32 Trigger to Sync Table creme 34 Result summary Trace data ete eere ruens 299 Results Data format remote AN 295 EVM remote 300 Magnitude Capture rre rettet 299 Magnitude C
24. Enable Right Limit On Filter Type Normal 3dB l 5 Pole Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List 1 8 MHz sparse Transient Spectrum Reference Power Enable eft Limit Enable Right EIE aaa ettet ce tech trees 134 alc 134 Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency Uert 135 Transient Spectrum Reference Power 135 Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit Controls whether the results for the frequencies to the left or to the right of the center frequency or both are considered in the limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph measurement This parameter effects the Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 and Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals using either the check on the left or right side only allows you to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel while ignoring the side where adjacent channels are located Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit LEFT on page 260 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit RIGHt on page 260 Filter Type Defines the filter type for the resolution filter for the Modulation Spectrum and Transi ent Spectrum measurements Normal 3 dB Gauss filter 5 pole according to the GSM standard Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE on page 263 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List This setting is only required by th
25. If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 224 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 225 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 224 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 224 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face Level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 223 Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Input Settings Frequency Digital IQ I Q Mode Input Config Analog Baseband High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path Anal
26. Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 220 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 220 6 4 4 2 Frequency Settings The frequency span to be measured can be defined using a start and stop frequency or a center frequency and span alternatively it can be set to a specific characteristic value automatically Frequency and span settings can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which
27. Power vs Time Filter on page 56 e Define how the limit line defined by the standard is to be aligned to the mea sured slots and whether the relative positioning of the TSCs is measured or derived from the position of the specified Slot to Measure only For measurements strictly according to standard use the default Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to Measure For non standard signals or signals with conspicuous slot timing use the Per Slot setting Tip use the Delta to Sync result of the Power vs Slot measurement to verify the slot timing User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 184 10 11 12 13 14 15 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals Select the Display Config button and select one or more of the following displays for power results up to a total of 16 windows e PvT Full Burst power graph of all slots bursts in the selected slot scope over time e Power vs Slot table of power per slot in the current frame and over all frames Tip Also display the Magnitude Capture for a general overview of the measured data Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key Check the PvT Full Burst results to determine if the signal remains within the limits specified by the standard in all slot
28. REL Determines whether absolute or relative power values are returned lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP IMPR OUT Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Usage Query only Manual operation See Outer IM Table on page 38 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL This command queries the results of the measured distortion products for the frequen cies in the gap between the GSM carrier subblocks for non contiguous carrier alloca tion The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Offsets are lower than 1 8 MHz 400 KHz 600 KHz 1200 KHz For details see Duter Narrowband Table on page 40 Retrieving Results The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute measurement frequency For contiguous carrier allocation or if narrowband noise measurement is disabled this table is empty For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of distortion Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which distortion power is measured Default unit Hz lt RBW gt numeric value Res
29. RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 103 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 103 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 103 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 103 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75
30. The following values are displayed Table 4 4 Modulation spectrum results Result Description Offset kHz Fixed frequency offsets from the center frequency at which power is measured Power Negative Power at the frequency offset to the left of the center frequency Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Power Positive Power at the frequency offset to the right of the center frequency Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Table 4 5 Frequencies and filter bandwidths in modulation spectrum measurements Offset Frequency kHz RBW kHz VBW kHz 100 30 30 200 30 30 250 30 30 400 30 30 600 30 30 800 30 30 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 25 GSM UO Measurement Results Offset Frequency kHz RBW kHz VBW kHz 1000 30 30 1200 30 30 1400 30 30 1600 30 30 1800 30 single carrier BTS 30 single carrier BTS 100 multi carrier BTS 100 multi carrier BTS Note Normal vs Wide Modulation Spectrum measurements In previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum a
31. User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 82 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode o MCWN measurements and MSRA mode Only the default GSM UO measurement Modulation Accuracy is available in MSRA mode not the new MCWN measurement see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard for GSM 200 kHz by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the R amp S FSW GSM application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the basis of evaluation for example the Slot to Measure or the slot scope The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indi cated in the window header for each result display Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time
32. When using an external trigger source the application assumes that the trigger offset is set such that the GSM frame start is aligned with the start of a capture Therefore only narrow searches are performed from the beginning of the Synchronization proc ess for power trigger or free run mode 5 11 Timeslot Alignment Reference Time The definition of a reference time is necessary for the following description of timeslot alignment In the standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 in Section 5 7 it is stated that Irrespective of the symbol duration used the center of the training sequence shall occur at the same point in time This is illustrated in Figure 5 7 3 of the standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 which is reproduced below for convenience figure 5 17 Due to this requirement the middle of TSC or center of Active Part shall be used as the reference time when specifying timeslot alignment Additionally the middle of TSC is used for the alignment of the Power vs Time limit masks see also Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 Timeslot Alignment Normal Symbol Period Burst Reduced Symbol Period Burst Fig 5 17 Timing alignment between normal symbol period and reduced symbol period bursts As described in chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 60 the middle of TSC can be defined with respect to symbol periods and symbol decision instants This is illustrated in figure 5 18 You can see that fo
33. i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector This is the only available input source for MCWN measure ments Input e el Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes Radio Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Impedance Digital I tate Direct Path Analog High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz Baseband YIG Preselector Input Connector MP Ut COUP NING e SHP 146 AVVO CURING P E 146 Bldg M 146 Fligh Pass Fiter ME EE 147 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 219 Impedance For MCWN measurements the impedance is always 50 Q Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough
34. sess eee enne 311 READDURGOCMACCOurScvlMERRor RMG MANImum eene een rennen nnne 311 READ BURG MACCurScvlMERRor RMG GDE Viation aiie 311 READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress AVERage 312 READ BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress CURREN eeens rtr rre rn thirteen knee ti qan age 312 READ BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimum esses eene i iiid i eaaa 312 READ BURG MAC CurscvlOGllbporess GDEVlation esent 312 READ BURSIIMAGGuracyE PERGerntle E VM rto tone bane pe aerea eM EFE EEdeE SE ore heo 312 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROE ur teret ren treni ets 313 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile PERROr eese enne enema 313 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage essent ree Diri Eneak 313 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent essere nnne eterne nnne 313 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum esses eene aaia iiaa 313 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation esee 313 READ BURStI MAC Curacy PERROrRMS AVERa JE rennen iiias 314 READ BURStI MACCu racy PERRO RMSiCURREN AA 314 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum essent rennen nnns 314 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation eee 314 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage sess ree neret nnne 308 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent essent nnne nnn inns 308 READ BURG MACCurscv
35. 3 ene 108 Settings Programming examples Statistics eerte 364 368 371 373 374 Protection RE input remote 2 rtt ted 219 PVT eedem 378 Configuratio EE 132 Filler 4 56 132 Filler EMM 2 Hence betta 190 Filters frequency response 2057 Filters step response 2057 Full Burst evaluation method seeeseeseeseereereeren 28 Full burst results remote 2 901 Llimit line time alignment ss 193 Reference Beer tee ege Eed 54 Referente tiME euer eege ertet etes 54 Q OPSK e ned 46 49 378 Measurement filter nsss 58 Modulationy 2 55 25 acco E Ee iet 98 R RBW at 1800 KAZ io petere tem tees 24 26 135 Reference level tonsini inisi 112 151 Auto level cedat eas Automatic m bienes ul M UNS 112 152 Unit 4 2 112 151 MEI TE 112 151 Reference measurement Average count MOWN ssssesseesieeerererrsese 161 163 Carrier selection MCWN ssseseeeceseeeeeesereerereenen 164 Enabling MER edd Manual levels MCWN eS MOWN per MOWN remote iet tet ed be tse Power level MCWN ES Settings MCOWN rte rent ttes Reference power EM cssc terio sitire d tr en ER Fen P E vato dg 54 Transient Spectrum ect rrr rem 135 Reference powers MOWN RTE 75 Reference time oec itte eet ert ete ge dc 65 IM deed ee edd 54 Refreshing MSRA applications rtr 125 MSRA applications remote sssssss 292 MSRT applications remote
36. Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 01 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 O 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 TY gir Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1 O 2111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 2 1 Q 01 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11 21 QI 11 2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 2 215 OQI2112 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB o Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Commands SENSE ERT FREQUENCY EE 266 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE 11 522 eege EZE EES EA ec iR e Reg 263 TE Se e e ee CEN BEE 232 SENSe JFREQ ency CENTer STEP iit eo Rest Map Elend EE 232 SENSe FREQUuency CENTer ER D I tia tii tn Ere cie sace rt epe Se tes ED ene Ode Ren CA VERA RO SER EEG 233 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet e SENSe FREQUENCYISPAN DEE SENSE FREQUENCY S E SENS amp IFBREQUGSDCy S TOP iere tu care Ere ove cet cx tu ee ER a uio LEUR e EAE a A ANEELA SENSE ee le RE 296 SENSe MSRA GAPTure EE 292 SENS6e PROB6sp5 ID PARTnhUmDGFE cc tie
37. EVM Default unit NONE Example READ BURS RMS SDEV Usage Query only For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Frequency Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Frequency Error see table 4 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 309 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements DEEN Return values Result numeric value Frequency error Default unit Hz Example READ BURS FREQ SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum
38. Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported T GSM 380 T GSM 410 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 204 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 205 Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 206 Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measurements only Defines the maximum output power per carrier which determines the limit lines for the modulation spectrum UO measurements and MCWN measurement In Auto mode the maximum measured power level for the carriers is used This setting is only available for multicarrier measurements Remote command CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO on page 208 CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier on page 208 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements 6 4 3 2 Carrier Settings The Carrier settings define whether the expected signal contains a single or multiple carriers Up to 16
39. If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 285 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 285 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 286 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 285 7 1 2 2 General Marker Settings General marker settings are defined in the Marker Settings sub tab of the Marker tab 7 1 2 3 Result Configuration Markers Marker Settings Traces Marker Table Marker Scaling Marker Table
40. Modulation Filter TSC AB GMSK GMSK Pulse TS 0 TS 1 TS 2 User HSR QPSK 16QAM 32QAM Narrow Pulse TSC 0 TSC 7 Wide Pulse User NB 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM Linearised GMSK Pulse TSC 0 TSC 7 User AQPSK Linearised GMSK Pulse Subchannel 1 TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 Subchannel 2 TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 TSC 0 Set 2 TSC 7 Set 2 Subchannel 1 User Subchannel 2 User GMSK GMSK Pulse TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 TSC 0 Set 2 TSC 7 Set 2 User Definition of the Symbol Period 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period The following sections define the symbol period for various modulation types 5 9 1 GMSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate The GMSK frequency pulse is defined in the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 as a Gaussian pulse convolved with a rectangular pulse as illustrated at the top of fig ure 5 12 The phase of a GMSK signal due to a sequence of symbols aj is defined in the standard as t iT e t 3 o g u du Phase of a GMSK signal due to a sequence of symbols 5 1 where e g t the frequency pulse eT the normal symbol period The modulating index is chosen such that the maximum phase change of 11 2 radians per data interval is achieved Note that the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 2 5 Output phase for Normal Burst GMSK The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure
41. POWer SET Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or External and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 237 Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured Example READ WSP MOD GAT Result 0 00032303078 0 00016890001 Usage Query only Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 7 3 Trigger to Sync CONFigure TRGS NOFBins Value This command specifies the number of bins for the histogram of the Trigger to Sync measurement Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Number of bins Range 10 to 1000 RST 10 Default unit NONE Manual operation See No of Bins on page 137 CONFigure TRGS ADPSize Value This command specifies the number of measurements after which the x axis is fixed for the histogram calculation of the Trigger to Sync measurement Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Adaptive data size Range 10 to 1000 RST 100 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Adaptive Data Siz
42. Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the FJ Open icon in the toolbar Select the UO Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension oa BR o DN Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the I Q data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser gt xzy xml How to Export and Import UO Data 4 Drag the UO parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser al gt Hei ay xml e D x xzy xml xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz di
43. R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements TE Modulation RBW 300 kHz RBW 100 kHz RBW 30 kHz HSR W 16QAM 3 1 dB 5 5 dB 10 3 dB HSR W 32QAM 3 1 dB 6 1 dB 11 3 dB Example For a normal burst 8PSK signal for example and a power level of 35 dBm the refer ence values according to table 5 8 would be RBW Reference power 300 kHz 35 dBm 1 7 dB 33 3 dBm 100 kHz 35 dBm 3 8 dB 31 2 dBm 30 kHz 35 dBm 7 7 dB 27 3 dBm 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results For MCWN measurements various limit lines are calculated e Wideband noise limits e Limits for intermodulation products that have to be measured with an RBW of 100 kHz e Limits for intermodulation products that have to be measured with an RBW of 300 kHz e Limits for narrowband measurements that have to be measured with an RBW of 30 kHz The limit is defined at 3 distinct measurement offsets each then connected by straight lines For each of these limit lines a limit check is performed and the results can be queried They are also indicated in the Spectrum Graph display see Spectrum Graph on page 36 Exceptions For measurements using an RBW of 100 kHz wideband noise certain intermodulation products the standard allows for the signal to exceed the specified limits in excep tional cases Thus you can define whether the limit check for MCWN measurements considers these exceptions or not If exceptions are
44. Remote control S GE 52 ee 120 159 241 T igger level rette 119 159 External trigger remote A 239 UO Power remote we 240 IF Power remote 240 RF Power remote geesde 240 Tigger SOUE ener t 117 157 E EE 118 157 Free Run 4 117 157 fadum ach ened ay eS 118 IF Power a 158 MSRA sa 157 PoWer S6ellsO TEE 119 nud POWGT id Ee pt EE 118 158 ELI 119 Trigger to Sync Graph evaluation method A 32 Remote control 956 Results remote 3 301 Table evaluation method s ssssssssssrinsseeeenrnneeeene 34 Triggering MCWN remote eese et Eed e 268 Troubleshooting ETLOUS 1 eterne nies de c poc epa a ues a 191 Input overload 2219 RESUS M 189 TSG aes 50 98 378 s gem 99 IRC UT ens Genet 139 Defining remote control 2 213 DEPEAGSNCY cirein rni detecestenteesadtingtadezecroectvadtieests 59 BIcfe Wilson 99 Llimit line time alignment ve 133 Middle Oficio neret ies reda 66 Reference signal wn d91 Slot alighiment rent mer renes 65 Synchronization EE 129 WSEN GETING PE 98 99 U WE CUP IIIAK itu th enr et tee eee ente 378 Units Reference level sssssssssseeees 112 151 Updating Result display e cedit ene tert ot rentes 125 Result display remote ssssssss 292 Uplink Userful part Slot i tracer tirer meten nete
45. SPEC MOD 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Usage Query only Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the internal reference power of the Modulation Spectrum This command is only available for Modulation Spectrum Table evaluations see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz 30 kHz Example READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate Usage Query only Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 READ SPECtrum MODulation GATing READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Modulation Spectrum mea surements see Modulation Spe
46. See Trigger Source on page 117 See Free Run on page 117 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 118 See UO Power on page 118 See RF Power on page 118 See Power Sensor on page 119 See Time on page 119 See Trigger Source on page 157 See IF Power on page 158 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW OUTbutTRlGoer zportz DiPRechlon eee ee cece eaeaeaaaaaaaaeeaaeteseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeaeed 243 ODTPut PRIGSerspor EVE iei cn haer edna Fette catre eee eae 243 OUTPut TRIGger port OTYBe aA aote o AER 243 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate ener 244 OUTbutTRlGoer zportz PULL Se ENG 244 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 115 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGger
47. The Trigger to Sync table shows the following values Value Description Current Trigger to Sync value for current measurement in us Average Trigger to Sync value averaged over the Statistic Count number of measurements Min Minimum Trigger to Sync value in the previous Statistic Count number of measurements Max Maximum Trigger to Sync value in the previous Statistic Count number of measurements Std Dev Standard deviation of the individual Trigger to Sync values to the average value Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH TGST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results chapter 11 8 8 Trigger to Sync Results on page 327 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements The UO data captured by the default GSM UO measurement includes magnitude and phase information which allows the R amp S FSW GSM application to demodulate signals and determine various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accu racy modulation or transient spectrum in just one measurement As the result of a swept measurement on the other hand the signal cannot be demodulated based on the power vs frequency trace data Frequency sweep mea surements can tune on a constant frequency Zero span measurement or sweep a frequency range Frequency sweep measurement For multicarrier measurements the GSM standard defines limits for some parameters concerning noise and intermodulation products Thus a new separate measurement
48. ccccececeeee cece eee ce cee ae netten enne enne nnn nnns nnn nn nnns 291 CAL Culate nzMSbRA WlNDow cnzs MAL 291 CAL Culate nzMSbRA WlNDow nz MlIVal see ennn enne sensns nnn as 292 TREI E E EE 292 SENSe MSRA CAPT tire OFF Sel 2 mtr pesa c Pere z2 asa zoe A REESE aao ER NEA E dd 292 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart
49. erence measurement is performed see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 270 Parameters Level power level in dBm RST 0 00 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF PLEV 35 Manual operation See Power Level on page 164 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer RBW Level This command defines the reference power level using different RBWs for MCWN measurements if no reference measurement is performed see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 270 The query returns the measured values and is only available if a reference measure ment is performed 11 6 5 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Parameters Level reference power level in dBm without a unit Parameters for setting and query lt RBW gt RBW in Hz 30e3 Reference power for RBW 30 kHz 100e3 Reference power for RBW 100 kHz 300e3 Reference power for RBW 300 kHz Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF PLEV 35 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 300e3 34 7 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 100e3 32 8 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 30e3 27 2 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS ON CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 30e3 Queries the measured reference power level for an RBW of 30 kHz Manual operation See Ref Power RBW 300 kHz on page 164 See Ref Power RBW 100 kHz on page 164 See Ref Power RBW 30 kHz on page 165 Configurin
50. in all 200 GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAX gt 0 35961171984672546 Query the averaged phase error RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage 0 082186274230480194 Programming Example Measuring Statistics This example demonstrates how to determine statistical values for a measurement in a remote environment RST Reset the instrument CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW Activate occupied bandwidth measurement INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW Returns the results for the OBW measurement 11 13 5 Programming Examples Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM wideband noise measurement of a GMSK modulated signal with multiple carriers in a remote environment ees Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Select the multicarrier wideband noise measurement CONF MEAS MCWN Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt dg eesseesec Signal Description Configure a multicarrier base station wide area DUT without power classes CONFigure MS DEV TYPE MCBW CONFigure MS NETWORK PGSM CONFigure MS
51. lt State gt 110 ON OFF 1 ON check limit 0 OFF do not check limit RST 1 Example CONF SPEC LIM LEFT OFF Manual operation See Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 134 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE lt DetectorMode gt This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FSW K5 only Parameters for setting and query lt DetectorMode gt PEAK RMS RST RMS Example CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Reference Power on page 135 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Mode gt This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Transi ent Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit This command is only available when the Transient Spectrum measurement is selected see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate on page 356 Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example Select Transient Spectrum measurement JI measurement on captured UO data CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate Only list results are required CONFigure SPECtrum SELect LIST JI Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL I gt 0 933200000 933200000 101 55 36 00 ABS PASSED CONFigure SPECtrum M
52. port OTYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 115 See Level on page 116 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 115 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 116 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to
53. ree ea NN EEE ica te capice to t Eye est FRE EENEG 357 CONFiguarer MS ER iani redet reet uen tope a eerta den ae 357 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure MSI MCARNer AC FOITIBES coord re err atte tk trn e ca rg aes 358 GONFigureMSI MOAR Ier BIS ass reti a E EEN 358 CONFigure MS MCARrier FILTer eeeeeeeeeeeee eene ennemis 358 CONFigurer ER e E ECH E EE 359 CONFigure MS MCARTICR e CET 359 GONFigure MSI MTY P Errina a E a A G 359 CONFigure MS POWer AUTO elle 12 repa true nnt hp re ka aii aa 360 CONFiguire EMS SSEareh ae tivities ra titre ees 360 CONFloure W bechum MODulation UIMIT esses nnne 361 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlFEbRbor AVERage sn sesesseensesere reren ertrtttrerorererersesrnnnnnn nnn 361 FEICh BURSIEMAGCOuUracy FERRoEODRREHBE descendaient iaa 361 FETCh BURSIEMAGCuracy FERRorMAXimum coat ierat eo aano to ene aka d ENNER CECR 361 FETCH BURSIEMACGuracy FERRor SDEVialior cerita ne Lee nera coena eh 361 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFERRor AVEHRage nennen etes 361 READ BURSI MACCuracy FERRor CURRent eiiis ii sisiane aderit asina 361 READ BURStE MACCuracy FERROr MAXIMUM entnehmen nene nnns 361 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFERRor GDEViaton nennen 361 FETCH WSPectrumMODulaton ABL sss atu erret ert exer Fe e eee ceat 362 READ WSPectrum MODulation PALE 2 2 1 2 2 22 12 22 2 oorr ti eere ea ENEE EVEN EE 362 FETCh WSPectrum MODulation HRtFe
54. t is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB 11 5 3 3 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Usage SCPI confirmed INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifier hardware Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 114 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 235 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 114 Configuring the Attenuation IN Termen oce eee oae ered hoe d aee eee ax e aede uses a Ru Ced ear gu nima x 235 INSTA Rc WS X IS RP WM RP dee Ne 236 djs T M 236 INPUEEATTAUTO ies cere des See dee Ed 237 INPUCEATT STATE 237 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This
55. the same slot is evaluated R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count for statisti cal evaluations For Trigger to Sync measurements where only one result is calculated per data acqui sition the Statistic Count determines how many values are considered for averaging As mentioned above the Statistic Count for Trigger to Sync measurements refers to the number of data acquisitions whereas for all other measurements the value refers to the number of frames Since usually more than one frame is captured per data acquisition the number of data acquisitions required to obtain the required number of results the Statistic Count may vary considerably If both Trigger to Sync and other result types are active at the same time the latter are finished first and the traces in particular the current measurement trace remains unchanged until the Trigger to Sync measurement has also finished The counter in the channel bar counts the slower of the two events i e the number of measurements if a Trigger to Sync result display is active D Statistic count for Trigger to Sync vs other measurements In MSRA mode only a single data acquisition is performed by the MSRA Master and the R amp S FSW GSM application analyzes this data repeatedly Thus the Trigger to Sync measurement will only count one data acquisition and can never reach a larger Statistic Count
56. trace can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Modulation Spectrum diagram see Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded The limits depend on the following parameters Frequency band Device Type only BTS type not MS type Burst Type Modulation Filter limits are different for Higher Symbol Rate and Wide Pulse Filter case 2 and others case 1 see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 3 e The measured reference power 30 kHz bandwidth e The measured burst power power level e Number of active carriers for multicarrier BTS The limit is relaxed by 10 log10 N dB for offset frequencies 21 8 MHz see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 2 5 13 2 5 13 3 5 14 Impact of the Statistic Count Limit Check for Transient Spectrum The determined Transient Spectrum Accuracy values can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Transient Spectrum diagram see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 The limits depend on the following parameters e Graph Limit check of maximum Max trace Table Limit check of absolute and relative scalar values The limit masks are generated adaptively from the measured signal The
57. value Tip You can query the current value of the counter for both Trigger to Sync and other measurements in remote control as well See SENSe SWEep COUNCt TRGS CURRent on page 252 Obviously the Statistic Count has an impact on all results and values that are re cal culated after each measurement The higher the count the more values are taken into consideration and the more likely the result of the calculation will converge to a stable value On the other hand the fewer measurements are considered the higher the var iance of the individual results and the less reliable the calculation result will be For instance if the Statistic Count is set to values smaller than 5 the measured refer ence power for Modulation Spectrum Table see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 and Transient Spectrum Table see Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 measurements increases This leads to a higher variance of the measured relative powers at the offset frequencies and thus to a reduced measurement dynamic For the Power vs Time see PvT Full Burst on page 28 and Power vs Slot see Power vs Slot on page 27 measurements a small Statistic Count increases the variance of the measured slot powers The slot power is required to calculate the PVT limit lines 5 15 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise For multicarrier measurements the GSM standard defines limits for some parameters concerning noise and intermodulatio
58. 1 This is also the start of the bit period of bit number 0 the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The phase change due to the first tail symbol is illustrated at the bottom of figure 5 12 where you can see that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the fre quency pulse occurs at the beginning of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5 9 2 Definition of the Symbol Period GMSK Frequency Pulse Frequency oo o ho to Az e n 25 2 15 1 0 5 0 0 5 1 15 2 2 5 Time Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Phase Decision Instant Phase rad g Symbol Period 0 25 2 45 1 0 5 0 0 5 1 1 5 2 2 5 Time Symbol Periods Fig 5 12 GMSK Frequency Pulse top and phase of the first tail symbol bottom 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM AQPSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate The EDGE transmit pulse is defined in the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 as a linearised GMSK pulse as illustrated at the top of figure 5 13 Note that according to the definition in the standard the center of the pulse occurs at 2 5 T where T is the normal symbol period NSP The baseband signal due to a sequence of symbols is defined in the standard as y t cg t iT 2T Baseband signal due to a sequence of symbols 5 2 where C t the transmit pulse Note that the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 3 5 Pulse shaping for normal burst 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM The time reference t 0 is th
59. 130 Multicarrier filter aD Process siisii 24163 Threshold et tete re reno 130 T Tail bits Reference SIGMA zx btt ret nto e green TOMA e Time Reference oi etcetera eure lee aiia n diversas Reference PvT Time alignment e MMII OS geess Time trigger DONKEY inposa eege 119 Timeslot alignment a69 Timing advance 298 MEMOS is css ccn erroe crap Dot re to ee 133 Hcc 170 el le lee BEE 168 Default iocis ciet N EEA 168 MOG TEM 169 Mode remite eiit t tertie pent 282 Number of result values sssesesesss 300 Presettihgi snini RS 170 e E 169 Statistical evaluation MSRA mode ssseseeeeeneeeeeeen 84 Training Sequence SOO clo EE 98 Transient spectrum TE E 32 Transient Spectrum Graph results remote AA 301 Graph evaluation method das Limit CHECK es dni toc rit be RE ERR HR d 70 Reference POWER eic eee ie to niaaa 135 Settings Table results remote AA 325 Table evaluation method sesessssss 31 Trigger PAULO SETin eege Een Conditions remote Configuration Softkey suisia eiii 156 Drop out time 119 159 E ET 52 129 External remote i cioe tette tiet 241 Fiese RUM 2409s ee 52 Holdoff 120 160 Hysteresis 120 159 MSRA iei eR Ee etae iere een 53 SIE E 119 159 Offset synchronization desiderant iai 129 Output 115 120 154 160
60. 208 ge ee UI RE RT Le EE 360 EE ee UE RAR de Le ele Wl e EE 256 CONFOUeEMSI SYNC MODE e 254 CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY DIAGnostic SERVICe NSQOUFGB uie nce nere rrr ence rra eR EORR Pea RR FR Te ER Vac e ra Xe Ka YR Nea 231 DIAGNOSUC ell n 354 DISPIay FORMAE aterert ev oett teet vnnd vec EP cti erect tec EP cre et o E Be 274 BIIUEVEUEENIIT 286 ISP I RAT Bre Sine SIZE areca 274 DISPlay WINDowsr TRACe Y SGALe AU TO cerent three tene 288 BISPlay WINBOwstis TRAGCeSEP MODE irn rte ote rii cp ee er n aea 282 DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGest Y SCALe u concreta naro rep en tr este eget ere once 234 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum cessere 288 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVVel sese DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet essent 234 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe RPOSition essent 289 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue sees nennen nennen 289 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum esses 290
61. 339 Outer Wideband Table Displays the numeric results of the wideband noise measurement for the frequencies outside of the sub blocks but not in the gap Measurement offsets relative to outer most carriers are always greater than 1 8 MHz Note The results for the gap are displayed in the Inner Wideband Table R amp S9FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays El 1 Spectrum Graph Start 935 8 MHz 10001 pts 2 84 MHz Stop 964 2 MHz 3 Outer Wide Band Table Segment Freqs Worst Result RBW 100 kHz Start MHz Stop MHz Offset MHz Freq MHz dB dBm to Limit 2 Inner Wide Band Table Segment Freqs Worst Result RBW 100 kHz Start MHz Stop MHz Offset MHz Freq MHz dB dBm A to Limit 9 o For each of the following regions the parameters described in Wideband noise results are shown e frequencies to the left of the lowermost carrier e frequencies to the right of the uppermost carrier The wideband noise tables divide the total frequency range of the wideband noise measurement defined by the selected span and the GSM band in non overlapping frequency segments For details see chapter 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement on page 80 The following parameters are shown for wideband noise tables for each segment Table 4 14 Wideband noise results Result Description Start MHz Absolute start frequency of segment Stop kHz Absolute stop frequency of segment Offset MHz Frequency of the worst measured wideband no
62. CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC 3 1 JI Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC TSC I gt 3 JI Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC SET I gt 1 See Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC USER Value This command sets the bits of the user definable TSC The number of bits must be in accordance with the defined burst type and modulation as indicated in Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC USER must be defined first see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC on page 213 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt The slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt String containg the user defined bits e g 10101111101010101100111100 for a GMSK normal burst Example CONF CHAN SLOT TSC USER Manual operation See User TSC User Sync on page 99 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Table 11 2 Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal GMSK 26 Normal 8PSK 78 Normal 16QAM 104 Normal 32QAM 130 Higher Symbol Rate QPSK 62 Higher Symbol Rate 16QAM 124 Higher Symbol Rate 32Q
63. Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page 286 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Seleot MI E 173 Peak SCAR sese c rises conce a aedi ert a rede pa d asd ca et ul Rh b C TCR CU AUR 173 tres Ne mita TRE YS C TU a a a IET En 174 Max Peak rniosan a a a EAE E AAEE a EE AAEE 174 Select Marker Selects the subsequent marker marker 1 2 3 4 or delta marker to be edited or to be used for a marker function The currently selected marker number is highlighted Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 287 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 287 Result Configuration Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 287 CAL
64. FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr FETCRh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile PERROI anne r noter nen a 313 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERor PEARK AVERaoed nete nreen eren tentent 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRSent eese neret 313 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERRor PEAkK MA Ximum nennen nennen nnns 313 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERor PEAkK GDEMiatton een eene 313 FETOH BURG MAC CuracvlPERor RMG AVEHage nennen nennen nennen 314 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERor RMG CURhent AAA 314 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum essent nennen 314 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation essere enne 314 FETOH BURG MAC CuracvllEVMIPEARK AVEhage nennen nennen 308 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum essent rennen 308 FETOH BURG MAC Curacvll EVMIPEAR GD Viaton A 308 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage sess rennen eene 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent essen neret nreen rennen nnns 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum asrini 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation essen 309 FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEASure FETCh MCAPture Leger rrt dre re ep eri a Re ERE AR XR d EE Eua 303 FETCh SPECtrum MODUulation LIMiE e eon irren rrr eren ri teras 333 FETCh SPEGtmm MODulati n REESFGrI
65. Fig 5 22 Wideband noise table exceptions and delta to limit values R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Example Determining the delta to limit values for wideband noise tables In Wideband noise table exceptions and delta to limit values you see how the delta to limit values are calculated The measured wideband noise trace is blue The limit line taking exceptions into account is orange In each segment StartX to StopX the red arrow shows the worst delta to limit result e The first segment fails assuming no exception is allowed here e The second segment passes e In the third segment the normal limit line dotted line fails at frequency a How ever an exception is allowed and raises the limit for a certain range Thus the R amp S FSW GSM application recalculates the internal delta to limit trace solid orange line The new worst result is determined at position Worst3 This position is then used to determine the noise power and limit line values for the wideband noise table 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection An automatic carrier detection function is now available Adjusting the Center Fre quency Automatically Auto Freq For multi carrier measurements this function detects the available carriers in the input signal within a frequency range of approxi mately 25 MHz to 2 GHz The Auto Frequency function is sensitive to overload conditions Thus before using this function make sure the reference lev
66. Format Data remote ME 295 licum H X 47 V elle UCL ER Configuration Auto Set 138 Configuration automatic remote 264 JU Eden 47 SEARCHING erret trm nr E reges 52 SUPE 47 Free Run Ee Frequency Bands scere Bands GSM standard Barids ET enee eegen Configuration MCWN Configuration remote Configuration Softkey HOPPING rmn List Modulation Spectrum Table 135 RE 135 List Sample rate S List Spectrum limit lines vinissi s 134 MEWN remote edente E 267 Offset sone 111 150 Rr 149 Start os ki 149 Frequency sweep measurements GOMIQUIING PE 138 Selecting rotten e reprehen 139 Frontend Configuration cii reir rrt t iot Configuration remote ins MCWN remote crece endete tecta Full scale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 226 Digital Me ii icri tie fta etre ta 105 Digital UO remote f Unit digital UO remote G Gap CANONS IDEE 101 145 Gating f 117 46 49 378 O 58 o EA 60 98 lac 60 Pulse filler reete ite tet rete 98 GPRS teet im ene Pere be vr e RR 49 378 GSM eaten 46 378 Measurements
67. INSTrument SELEGt e i EAYOUEAD DIS WINDOW e EAEE 2 5 LAY OunCATalOg i WINDOW erret EEA rtu e ee ue re PR Ye EEN 277 LAYout IDENtify WINDow E geen E ET EE LAY ere E WINDOW tnter rte ret ren tr eer rne ner rc trn erre nta LAY OutrS PILING EE EAXOUCWINDOWSM gt ADD Soc A 280 LAY out WINDOWS IBENEUTJO cut reet reti eter x ex eterne ete tee EP Eee ex ENTE ERES 280 Egeter LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace LEAYout WINDOWSmD EE 281 MENGEN EE cases 344 MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ COMMEN i iat ort tet ep rr Ee ener 345 MMEMOry STOResns IQ S ATO ciii tta S derer E EL b E e e X IER E EY vu e EXE RER 345 OUTPutmislGgersporte DIRCIOT coder rota pea epe opu etu eS Se ves a ey concede ede exert ven epo hera s 243 OUTPut TRIGgersports EVel nr ctr rtr terere nr en ce eere Eee een FERRE OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe OUTPuETRIGger lt port gt PULSEHMMECI ate ss cous cnssincancesene sicasnencenepsconcensaacexsnenestesncenesdinds EAEE TETA 244 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe EENGLIh retro rrr nennen irn ert en E 244 READ AUTO RA ln 363 READ BURSE PTEMplate TRGS AVERage essent nennen innen etre 327 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS CURREN eege td 327 READ B RSEPTEMplate TRGS MAXIPOUITI s cn root duro aceite a edo aici Do EE E ENS EENET 327 READ BURSEtPTEMplate TRGS MlINimum R
68. Introduction oben Ee eege 192 Common SuffIxes sis ete oe cosa dhed Sec tidie teste i nue Eu Dee EREKE se I ENRETE 197 Activating GSM Measurements eese enne nnne nennen 197 Selecting the Measurement eese enne nnne nennen 202 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements eese 203 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements eee 266 Analyzing GSM Measurements eeeseeeeeeee ener nnne nnne nnns 273 Retrieving Results octets deep IUe e eege an 295 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eee 344 Status Reporting System eeeseseeeeeseeeeee enne nnne nennen nnn nennen nnns 345 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 4 11 11 Troubleshooting crrrinee iine eerte cn eran ne ne naar necu tena ne cc ica an nne crece aene 354 11 12 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility 355 11 413 Programming Examples esee enne nennen nennen nnne nnn nnne nennen 364 A Annex Reference eceisssiseasusen ana nan anna sana Ea aE ER EREREREEEKEERKF PAX Ru uA 378 AT List OF abbreviations nisi eere Eie cds narro ERE E Ce EXER ERE 378 A 2 VQ Data File Format iq tar eeseeeseseeeeeeeeneeeeneeen enne nnne nnne nnns 379 HE idee ibo er e 385 d
69. NSP 11 8 2 3 Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graph Results Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graphs consist of 1135 trace values two less than in previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers 11 8 2 4 Magnitude Capture Results The Magnitude Capture trace consists of 32001 trace values regardless of the defined capture time and thus of the length of the capture buffer 11 8 2 5 Trigger to Sync Results The Trigger to Sync Graph results consist of two traces Thus the results of the TRAC DATA query depend on the lt TraceNumber gt parameter TRACe1 returns the height of the histogram bins the number of values is defined by the number of bins see CONFigure TRGS NOFBins on page 264 TRACe2 returns the y values for the probability density function PDF of the aver aged values The number of values depends on the number of data captures Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 251 X values The results of the TRAC DATA X query also depend on the lt TraceNumber gt parame ter TRACe1 returns the time in s at the center of each bin in the histogram TRACez2 returns the time in s for the PDF function of the averaged values Retrieving Results 11 8 2 6 MCWN Spectrum Graph The Multicarrier Wideband Noise Spectrum Graph consists of one average trace with 10001 trace points Note that the final trace consists of combined traces from a sweep with an RBW of 100 kHz
70. Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual How to Export and Import I Q Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data How to Export and Import I Q Data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the E Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name on o0 5 o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Importing UO data 1
71. Panel View chapters Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 IEJVIDEGIDEMOD E ODUIDLIE 2 are recte ret arte eto ee di tte erred 154 IF Oui PVG QUINCY EE 154 INGIGS S OLIOD Seet merde euni m e ead a eek REES E 154 gui o4 154 L Output Tus uccisi cbe dese t eetba itti vi SEED bb pa Pese Pa CEOs DEDE Du 155 NUT MEE T T T 155 Ez c INNER UM 155 Mi MI NINE 155 IF VIDEO DEMOD Output This function is not available for the R amp S FSW GSM application IF Out Frequency This function is not available for the R amp S FSW GSM application Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 231 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements
72. QUEStionable SYNC ENABle nenese ieai rie a NOE ENEAN EOE E nennen 352 STATus QUEStionable SYNG NTRarsitioh rrt rtr Aaa st a nenne ten 353 STATus QUEStionable S YNC P TRansitlohi 1 anre tentaret tta erret rt ri nnns 353 STATueOUEG onable GvNCTEVENUN ae 352 GEN el TE ER E CU REN 352 GE Mel EE ET AR KEE 351 oxSTem PRESeECHANtnel EXEGUte ii aen tt ipee rote peret pe etu ERES eene XY XY TE eek 14e ETONE ATEN 201 SV SREM SEQUENCE p 201 jise wlexsvugpur E M M 247 Nee ERR rH n 298 Ree RN EE 246 Mise cH D Ipgam P Eaa EE TA ET ERATA E 297 TRACecnsl DATA 297 TRIGger SEQuernce BBPowert HOLJ Ot ttn otn rn ertt t tren rre ren n rennen 238 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe iti i irt rn rre erkennen SER Re EE ee PRESE EENS 238 TRIGger SEQuericeFHOLDOofI TIME aea canti toin rennen AEE OEN AE ENPENSA aNs 238 TRIGger SEQuerice 1FPower HOLDofF intrent trente i rre erre Enn 238 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis atr terr nra er irr tr nh Een 239 TRIGE SEQuence LEVEL Ee EE 239 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FPower vg TRIGger SEQuence LL EVel IQPOWSLF orn trrerr dAEENEEEE ENEE TENEN EE dE SOEN 240 TRIGger sEQUuericeL P EVeb REPOWSLE cuenca to dag eee tuv ea exe E EAEE EDE rey xr cue dde 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernalsport 5 nott
73. R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 137 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements A new separate measurement is provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application to deter mine the wideband noise in multicarrier measurement setups see chapter 4 2 Multi carrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 Signal DeSsenpuoni RS 266 e Input Outputand Frontend Settings trei reet eere e nerd ends 266 Reie e BEE EE 268 e Configuring the Reference Measurement 268 e Configuring the Noise Measurement eeeseeessisseeeeeen nennen tnnt 271 e Adjusting Settings Automatically 273 Eet Dale BEE 273 Signal Description The commands required for signal description are described in chapter 11 5 1 1 Device under Test Settings on page 203 chapter 11 5 1 4 Carrier on page 216 Input Output and Frontend Settings The commands required for input output and amplitude settings are described in chapter 11 5 2 1 RF Input on page 219 chapter 11 5 2 5 Configuring the Outputs on page 231 chapter 11 5 3 2 Amplitude Settings on page 233 11 6 2 1 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Frequency Settings The frequency span to be measured can be defined using a start and stop frequency or a center frequency and span alternatively it c
74. READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the I Q Imbalance When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the I Q Imbalance see table 4 1 Return values Result numeric value IO Imbalance Default unit NONE Example READ BURS IQIM SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the standard deviation measure ment of the IQ Offset taken over the selected number of bursts When the measure ment is started the analyzer is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 310 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements SSS SS SS SS SS SS eS SS Se Return values lt Result gt numeric value Standard deviation Default unit NONE Exa
75. RR RE ENIS CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency E CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier e MT YPe certet rrr nene nre eren rape da eun CONFourel MS MC Aber CARb ierzclGTATelt nne rennen nennen nenne 216 CGONFig ureEMSEMCARTrIer FAL OCALOM EE 218 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACartier eese 218 CONFigure MS MCARNner FIL Teh eminas treu tr Fen na cts quvacunceostyeadensa beaver deveanscepasnenaden En EN CONFigure MS EMGARKIGR MGB TS e GONFigureEMSTEMGARtIer 9 TAT 6 scx sccasietsavccccesesavevcesacsncsnecsadeecetsscsavintvacevesees tpe ner rentrer ten VEER GER ME dE CONFIQUreLMSEMULTFBURSECONSTE i censa nns ica asee E EE E E TAEDE TIENES GONFigure MS MULTEBU RStDEModulation t cort tr aS CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt PTEMplate GONFigure MSTEMULTESPECtrum MODp UWlatiOh car onere te e eterne prn Ferte e dena GONFigureE MS MULTI SPECtrum SWITching nnin ont rrt nto rne enne IER ROUER ECH AE GONFigureE MSTINETWorkFREQuerncy BAND nciour rte t o e atre to peer penetra ner EENEG CONFig re MS NETWOork TYPE carter tame tete nte t pre b ex Bv GONFigurerMS POWer AUTO ONGE cree tto eth coiere tne trie euro tne terrier nx nire ea rea CONFigure MS POWer AUTO SWEep TIME Sg CONEFigure MS POWern e GONFigure MS POWer POARrier AU TOT inae eno rrr rrt ht eth reete te eorpora nba 208 Ee ee le BER le
76. SEQuence SOURce on page 241 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a
77. SSC Trigger CONG ET 156 Trigger Offset 119 159 SPAM ese 149 ETC 149 MEWN e 149 Specifics for GonlfigulatiOn riot rin ern tenere es 90 Spectrum uo T 133 Spectrum Graph Isesult display 3 necne etes 36 Start frequency SOKE ERR 149 Statisti COUNT cent ies cee Lar oid abe d 124 190 Default Impact Remote Statistics Parameters entem eee HO Eee aed 23 Programming example 364 368 371 373 374 Status registers IC EC 346 347 Description 2 netter rrt rete 346 GSM PT 346 347 Querying 946 347 351 STAT QUESBOW 1 derer eter eegs 219 STATus QUEStionable DIQ 948 STATus QUEStionable LIMit esssuess 347 STATus QUEStionable SYNC sussss 346 Status reporting SyYSteEM ei etn 345 Stop frequency Softkey Subchannels Suffixes COMMON sranie ES 197 Remote commands deed dEr 194 Swap UO Ee cR 245 I free 123 Sweep ene BEEN 125 161 162 E Te EE 124 161 Time remote 245 246 SYMBOL GECISION sugue SEENEN 130 Symbol period PORK geed HL EE 9S2 QAM EE Definition EE EE ET pe Symbol rates allelu i e 50 Normal we OO SYNG cinereis 98 User defined sr 99 SyrichrohiZatlOti EE 129 pri S 139 Limit lines cit tern ttr m trenes 133 Measure only on sync
78. Sea 37 Maer iM EE 38 Outer IM Wale aaien Ee ra ee e ec ea ed aa a t ena ed 38 Inner Narrow Band Table 40 Outer Namowband Table trceeesiecocect eiae Eno rr Poe eee baa arro a iat 40 Inner Wideband Table eer n ei b rr ere n o e a rks 42 Quter Wideband EE 43 Marker Table ss x secet ero ied dae caet tac eee void rdi a ee D a a ad du VOR rd A DER Edd 45 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Spectrum Graph Displays the level results for the frequencies in the defined frequency span typically the Tx band The trace is calculated from a frequency sweep with a 100 kHz RBW and one sweep with a 300 kHz RBW The displayed trace is averaged over the Noise Average Count number of noise measurements 1 Spectrum Graph Start 935 8 MHz 10001 pts 2 84 MHz Stop 964 2 MHz The narrowband noise results if available are indicated as vertical green bars at the distinct measurement frequencies see Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 The results of the limit check are also indicated in the diagram see also chap ter 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results on page 76 Table 4 10 Limit line checks Label Possible values Description Limit line suffix lt k gt Limit check PASS FAIL Overall limit check for all limit lines Wideband Noise PASS FAIL Limit check for wideband noise trace lt current gt exceptions Number of detected exceptions provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 4 IM 100
79. TEEN EERSTEN EE 100 Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers oh 101 en 101 ice ive 101 IO CUM EE MISI ER TOT TET TETTE SRL 101 Carrier Allocation Defines whether a multicarrier measurement setup contains one subblock of regularly Spaced carriers only contiguous or two subblocks of carriers with a gap inbetween non contiguous For details see chapter 5 15 2 Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation on page 73 Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation on page 218 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only For non contiguous setups see Carrier Allocation the position of the gap must be defined as the number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier on page 218 Active carriers Defines which of the defined carriers are active for the current measurement Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c STATe on page 216 Frequency Defines the absolute frequency of each active carrier Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency on page 216 Modulation Defines the burst type modulation and pulse shape filter of each active carrier For possible combinations see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Note This setting determ
80. TSC is found the results are displayed Manual operation See Measure only on Sync on page 130 CONFigure MS SYNC IQCThreshold Value This command sets the IQ correlation threshold The IQ correlation threshold decides whether a burst is accepted if Measure only on Sync is activated If the correlation value between the ideal IQ signal of the given TSC and the measured TSC is below the IQ correlation threshold then the application reports Sync not found in the status bar Additionally such bursts are ignored if Measure only on Sync is activated Parameters for setting and query Value Range 0 to 100 RST 85 Default unit NONE Example CONF SYNC IQCT 0 Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 130 CONFigure MS DEMod DECision Value This command determines how the symbols are detected in the demodulator The set ting of this parameter does not effect the demodulation of Normal Bursts with GMSK modulation For Normal Bursts with 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM or AQPSK modulation or Higher Sym bol Rate Bursts with QPSK 16QAM or 32QAM modulation use this parameter to get a trade off between performance symbol error rate of the K10 and measurement speed Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query Value AUTO LINear SEQuence AUTO Automatically selects the symbol decision method LiNear Linear symbol decision Uses inverse filtering a kind of
81. a MIMO signal contained in the UO data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 383 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz eal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 Q Data File Format iq tar Element UserData Description Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema
82. a eo heu rave TEEN 203 GONFigurepMSENBETWOIKET YPE E 204 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND isses neret nnn innen 205 GONFIgarer MS POWer CIAS uccidere edes Geld ta er ten xo re ee a Patna eade ere eg 206 GONFigure MSEPOWerBPOARFiBr iiio uoc epu anonn quaa pe zov y EY Pe ERR RR dE 208 CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO Lesser nennen rn hne 208 CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE Value This command specifies the type of device to be measured Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query Value BTSNormal BTS TRX power class Normal BTSMicro BTS TRX power class Micro BTSPico BTS TRX power class Pico MSNormal MS normal type MSSMalI MS small type MCBLocal Multicarrier BTS Local Area MCBMedium Multicarrier BTS Medium Range MCBWide Multicarrier BTS Wide Area RST BTSNormal Example CONF DEV TYPE BTSNormal Example For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Device Type on page 91 CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE Value This command works in conjunction with the CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 205 command to specify the frequency band of the signal to be measured The command is not in line with the manual
83. a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event M
84. and a sweep with an RBW of 300 kHz see also chapter 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement on page 80 For narrowband noise measurement no trace results are available Numerical results can be retrieved using the FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL and FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALL commands 11 8 3 Magnitude Capture Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Magnitude Capture evaluation FETCHMGAPture SEOTS MEASUFG9 iunc nn nn rau t aha Rn ena ea Rana aa pma ad e Eae aho ba Re 302 FETCRMGAPtUe SLOTS SCOPE 2 2 dite eh raend eei aca ede auta Duae cl rw ena ta a ud 303 FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEASure This command queries the positions of the slots to measure in the current capture buf fer indicated by blue bars in the result display Return values Result The result is a comma separated list of positions for each slot with the following syntax xPos 0 xLen 0 xPos 1 xLen 1 where xPos i is the x value in seconds of the i th slot to measure xLen i is the length of the i th slot to measure in seconds The number of values is 2 the number of GSM frames in the current capture buffer If the number of frames defined by the statistic count all fit into the capture buffer at once the number of values is 2 statistic count If not the number of values is 2 the number of frames in the last capture Example FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEASure Result for 3 slot scopes e g after a s
85. be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 221 Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 220 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requi
86. command defines the total attenuation for RF input Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 113 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 113 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 237 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually
87. command is used to perform a single measurement that determines the trigger offset automatically This command is not available in MSRA mode Note that in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode if the Sequencer is active this com mand cannot be aborted via the ABORt command This can lead to a hang up situation when no trigger signal is available or the trigger level is not set correctly Use a device clear to abort the operation correctly Example CONF AUTO TRIG ONCE Usage Setting only Manual operation See Automatic Trigger Offset on page 138 CONFigure MS POWer AUTO SWEep TIME Value This command is used to specify the auto track time i e the capture time for auto detection This setting can currently only be defined in remote control not in manual operation Tip increase this value if less than every second GSM frame contains a signal Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Auto level measurement sweep time Range 0 01 to 1 RST Dis Default unit S Example CONF POW AUTO SWE TIME 0 01 MS 11 6 11 6 1 11 6 2 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements SENSe ADJust FREQuency This function adjusts the center frequency and ARFCN I Q mode only automatically For multicarrier measurements all carrier settings are automatically adjusted see chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 This command is not available when using the Digital Baseband Interface
88. e g phase error modulation spectrum CONF CHAN MSL MEAS Configure slot 0 1 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 2 CONF CHAN MSL NOFS 2 CONF CHAN MSL OFFS 0 aa a PvT Measurement settings Check PvT filter CONF BURG PTEM FILT gt G1000 Align the limit line to mid of TSC TS for each slot CONF BURS PTEM TAL PSL Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI In PvT limits are checked against the max in min traces Query the max power vs time trace TRAC2 DATA TRACe2 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for max trace CALCulate2 LIMitl FAIL 11 13 4 Programming Examples gt 0 Query the min power vs time trace TRAC2 DATA TRACe3 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for min trace CALCulate2 LIMit2 FAIL gt 0 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for slot 0 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOTO LIM FAIL gt 0 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for slot 1 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 LIM FAIL gt 0 Query the maximum phase error value for slot 1 slot to measure in current GSM frame FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURR gt 0 21559642255306244 Query the maximum phase error value for slot 1 slot to measure
89. edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 120 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation
90. error values for the current frame in percent BESIDE De 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all oe oe SEERROTERMS Phase Error results for all frames in entire measurement fall Pa ype gt READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor Origin Off Origin offset suppression for the demodulated signal in the READ BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress set Sup Slot to Measure Indicates the suppression of the DC carrier lt Resulttype gt pression the higher the suppression the better the DUT dB UO Offset 1 Q offset for the demodulated signal in the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset gt 96 Resulttype UO Imbal A measure for gain imbalances and quadrature errors READ BURSt MACCuracy IQIMbalance ance between the inplace and quadrature components of the sig lt Resulttype gt 96 nal Frequency Frequency error of the center frequency currently measured READ BURSt MACCuracy FERROor Error in the Slot to Measure lt Resulttype gt Hz Burst Average power measured in the slot READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer Power lt Resulttype gt dBm Amplitude Indicates how much the amplitude decreases over a mea READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop Droop sured slot lt Resulttype gt dB The R amp S FSW GSM application also performs statistical evaluation over a specified number of results see Statistic Count on page 124 To do so the same slot is eval uated in multiple frames namely in the num
91. exceptions to the limit line check that occurred for wideband noise in window 2 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Graph on page 36 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt MAX This command queries the maximum number of bands with exceptions to the limit line check that are allowed by the standard for the specified limit check in the selected measurement window Suffix lt k gt 112 The number of the limit check to query 1 Limit check for wideband noise 2 Limit check for intermodulation at 100 kHz no exceptions allowed 3 Limit check for intermodulation at 300 kHz no exceptions allowed 4 Limit line for narrowband noise no exceptions allowed 5 Exceptions in range A 6 Exceptions in range B Return values lt NoExcept gt integer Number of exceptions Example CALCulate2 LIMitl EXC COUN MAX Queries the maximum number of bands with exceptions to the limit line check allowed for wideband noise in window 2 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Graph on page 36 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation LIMit FAIL Result This command queries the results of the limit check for MCWN measurements Retrieving Results Parameters
92. for a normal burst e The modulation e g GMSK The training sequence TSC and Set For details on how to interpret the graphic see Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar on page 54 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration 6 3 6 2 Demodulation Settings The demodulation settings provide additional information to optimize frame slot and symbol detection The settings in this dialog box are available when you do the following Inthe Overview select the Demodulation button then switch to the Demodula tion tab Demodulation Setting Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Synchronization Burst TSC Measure only on Sync 1 Q Correlation Threshold 85 ou A Demodulatior Symbol Decision Tail amp TSC Bits pica Standard SV OMAN ras o p Mm 129 Measire oOnly Oni SYNC oido ied curo NEE 130 VQ Cortelatiort Threshold eniti die Ea ete esis 130 SVMBOl DECISION e E E 130 Tale TSO L C T m 131 Synchronization Sets the synchronization mode of the R amp S FSW GSM application Burst TSC First search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Second inside the found bursts search for the TSC of the Slot to Measure as given in the frame configuration Burst TSC is usually faster than TSC for bursted signals TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to Measure as given in the frame configuration This
93. frame start RST 0 Slots Example CONF CHAN MSL OFFS 5 Manual operation See First Slot to measure on page 128 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 Demodulation The demodulation settings provide additional information to optimize frame slot and symbol detection CON Figure MS ISYNC MODE os cantra rot reg einer c rte reato eere eee ences 254 E Les HIE ROCHER d ee CT EE 255 GONFigurep MS SYNG IOGC Threstiold EE 256 CONFigure MS DEMod DECision eeeeeeeeeisisieeeee esee eene sanae nhanh sanas ns s setenta 256 GONFigurer MS EE Eegeregie 257 CONFigure MS SYNC MODE Mode This command sets the synchronization mode of the R amp S FSW K10 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query Mode ALL TSC BURSt NONE ALL First search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Second inside the found bursts search for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration ALL is usually faster than TSC for bursted signals TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration This mode corresponds to a correlation with the given TSC This mode can be used for conti nous but framed signals or b
94. gt DATA TRACE lt n gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here Retrieving Results For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 4 1 GSM UO Measurement Results on page 17 e EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Trace bResuhte 300 e PvT Full Burst Trace bResuhts nnne 301 e Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graph Results 301 e Magnitude Capture ReSUIS 1 ern treiber hie re her rre ce eer reu rh re EE eh 301 Lngger to Sye E 301 e MOWN Spectrum RETTEN 302 11 8 2 1 EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Trace Results The error vector magnitude EVM as well as the phase and magnitude errors are cal culated and displayed for each symbol Thus the TRAC DATA query returns one value per symbol The number of symbols depends on the burst type modulation and number of carriers used for transmission as well as the oversampling factor used inter nally by the R amp S FSW GSM application The following table provides an overview of the possible number of symbols Table 11 5 Number of trace result values for EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error measurements Burst Modula Multi No of trace Comment Type tion carrier points BTS AB GMSK any 348 87 symbols ov oversampling factor 4 NSP ov NB GMSK OFF 588 147 symbols ov oversampling factor 4 NSP ov this corresponds to
95. gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only Analyzing GSM Measurements CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt MlVal This command queries the individual analysis intervals in the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available for GSM measurement channels R amp S FSW K10 in MSRA mode and only for result dis plays that display traces with a history i e maxhold minhold or average traces The result is a comma separated list of lt IntStart gt lt IntStop gt values for each interval Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds global time scale Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds global time scale Example CALC MSRA WIND2 MIV Result 3 707922995E 003 4 509000108E 003 8 323308080E 003 9 124384262E 003 1 293869223E 002 1 373976935E 002 Usage Query only INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deact
96. has been restored 4 Digital UO Input DATA Error This bit is set if the data from the Digital UO input module is erroneous Possible reasons e Bit errors in the data transmission The bit will only be set if an error occurred at the current measurement e Protocol or data header errors May occurred at data synchronization problems or vast transmission errors The bit will be set constantly and all data will be erroneous To solve the problem the Digital UO connection has to be newly initialized NOTE If this error is indicated repeatedly either the Digital UO LVDS connection cable or the receiving or transmitting device might be defect 5 not used 6 Digital UO Input FIFO Overload This bit is set if the sample rate on the connected instrument is higher than the input sam ple rate setting on the R amp S FSW Possible solution e Reduce the sample rate on the connected instrument e Increase the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW 7 not used Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 8 Digital UO Output Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital UO Output 9 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 10 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analy
97. how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 383 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an UO sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of
98. in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 234 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 235 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 236 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation
99. key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 248 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new Sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 292 6 3 6 d 6 3 6 1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Demodulation Demodulation settings determine how frames and slots are detected in the input signal and which slots are to be evaluated The Demodulation settings are available from the configuration Overview The Frame and Slot settings are identical to those in the Signal Description dialog box see chapter 6 3 2 2 Frame on page 92 and chapter 6 3 2 3 Slot Settings on page 95 GOL SCOPE D 126 Demodulation En Le cane aie ed a deor cr D le ore e e es 129 Slot Scope The slot scope defines which slots are to be evaluated see also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one
100. measurement see chapter 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter on page 56 GONFigure BURSEPTEMbplate T ll EE 258 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign eene ipininid arpian RER tana 259 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer Type The PvT Filter controls the filter used to reduce the measurement bandwidth for Power vs Time measurements The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to sup press adjacent active channels Depending on the device type single carrier or multicarrier see CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 203 different PvT filters are supported Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query Type G1000 Default for single carrier device Gaussian Filter 1000 kHz B600 single carrier only Gaussian Filter 600 kHz G500 single carrier only Gaussian Filter 500 kHz MC400 Recommended for measurements with multi channels of equal power MC300 Recommended for measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels RST G1000 single carrier MC400 multicarrier Example CONF BURS PTEM FILT G500 Manual operation See Power vs Time Filter on page 132 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign Mode This comma
101. message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 Trigger Level Trigger Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 239 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 240 Drop Out Time Trigger Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 238 Trigger Offset Trigger Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Note When using an external trigger the trigger offset is particularly important in order to detect the frame start correctly See chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 The R amp S FSW GSM application expects the trigger event to be the start of the active part in slot O offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remo
102. of the R amp S FSW GSM application requires the bits of the burst Tail Data TSC Data Tail to provide an ideal version of the measured signal The Data bits can be random and are typically not known inside the demodulator of the R amp S FSW GSM application 11 5 7 11 5 7 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt DETected STD DETected The detected tail and TSC bits are used to construct the ideal signal STD The standard tail and TSC bits as set using CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC are used to construct the ideal signal Using the standard bits can be advantageous to verify whether the device under test sends the correct tail and TSC bits Incor rect bits would lead to peaks in the EVM vs Time trace see EVM on page 18 at the positions of the incorrect bits RST DETected Example Replace detected Tail amp TSC bits by the standard bits CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits STD For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Manual operation See Tail amp TSC Bits on page 131 Measurement Measurement settings define how power or spectrum measurements are performed Mi 4 dq m Q 258 SSDS cil E 260 LEM deli EM EE 264 Power vs Time The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time
103. of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 227 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all four Analog Base band connectors or as a plain UO signal via two simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended l Q data only Differential l Q and inverse 1 Q data Not available for R amp S FSW85 Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 226 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Note Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 e As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port 3 can be used to trigger a measurement e Trigg
104. only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on
105. operation so the SCPI remote control command remains compatible with the R amp S FS K5 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt PGSM EGSM DCS PCS TGSM RGSM GSM PGSM Primary GSM EGSM Extended GSM DCS DCS PCS PCS TGSM T GSM RGSM Railway GSM GSM GSM RST EGSM Example CONF NETW PGSM Example For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Frequency Band on page 91 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND lt Value gt This command works in conjunction with thecCONFigure MS NETWork TYPE command to specify the frequency band of the signal to be measured The command is not in line with the manual operation so the SCPI remote control command remains compatible with the R amp S FS K5 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 380 410 450 480 710 750 810 850 900 1800 1900 380 380 MHz band valid for TGSM 410 410 MHz band valid for TGSM 450 450 MHz band valid for GSM 480 480 MHz band valid for GSM 710 710 MHz band valid for GSM 750 750 MHz band valid for GSM 810 810 MHz band valid for TGSM 850 850 MHz band valid for GSM 900 900 MHz band v
106. or outside the gap the R amp S FSW GSM application places an intermodulation measurement range of a certain bandwidth regardless whether intermodulation measurement is enabled or not Due to their more relaxed limits the IM measurement wins over the wideband noise measurement Thus many overlapping IM ranges can narrow down the wideband noise measurement segment until it is eliminated You can check this by activating only intermodulation IM order 3 and 5 OR only wideband measure ment and determining where a limit line is drawn and where there are none Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH OWID See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband OUTer ALL on page 341 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 173 4 Marker Table Wnd Type X value 1 Mi 13 25 GHz M 600 0 kHz 1 M 600 0 kHz 1 d 2 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 343 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 343 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 45 R amp SSFSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 Basics on GSM Measurements Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in GSM measure ments is provided here for a better understanding of the required con
107. page 69 Note Modulation RBW at 1800 kHz For the Modulation Spectrum Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MSFD See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 297 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 329 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 331 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 329 Modulation Spectrum Table The modulation spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of a certain part of the burst 50 to 90 of the useful part excluding the training sequence TSC by mea suring the average power in this part over several frames The Modulation Spectrum Table displays the measured power levels and their offset to the limits defined by the standard as numeric results Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 24 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Values that exceed both limits are indicated by red characters and an asterisk next to the value and a negative A to Limit value 2 Modulation Spectrum Table Offset Power Negative Offsets Power Positive Offsets dB to Limit dB dBm to Limit Note The graphical results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23
108. page 98 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC Value This command selects the training sequence code TSC Normal and Higher Symbol Rate Bursts or training synchronization sequence TS for Access Bursts of the specified slot and subchannel used by the mobile or base station See 3GPP TS 45 002 chapter 5 2 Bursts This command is not available for AQPSK modulation use CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC instead Suffix lt s gt 0 7 Number of the slot to configure Query parameters lt ResultType gt Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements TSC SET Queries the currently used TSC number or the set If no query parameter is defined only the TS or the TSC is returned TSC Only the TSC or TS is returned SET The set of the TSC is returned Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt Example Manual operation 011 2 13 4 5 6 7 0 1 02 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 TS0 TS1 TS2 USER training sequence for normal burst 0 7 One of the 7 pre defined training sequence codes is used 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 TSC number and set for normal burst rates TSO TS1 TS2 Training synchronization sequence for access bursts USER A user defined training sequence is used see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC USER on page 214 RST 0 II TSC 3 Set 1
109. parameters are available in this dialog box see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TYPE on page 215 Modulation Defines the modulation used in the slot The possible modulations depend on the set burst type see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 The graphical slot structure is adapted according to the selected modulation Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYPe on page 210 SCPIR This parameter is only available for AQPSK modulation It specifies the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR The value of SCPIR affects the shape of the AQPSK constellation see chapter 5 4 AQPSK Modulation on page 51 For an SCPIR of 0 dB the constellation is square as in normal QPSK while for other values of SCPIR the constellation becomes rectangular Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SCPir on page 211 Filter Specifies the pulse shape of the modulator on the DUT and thus the measurement fil ter in the R amp S FSW GSM application For details see chapter 5 7 3 Measurement Filter on page 58 The following filter types are supported for normal and higher symbol rate bursts e GMSK Pulse e Linearised GMSK Pulse Narrow Pulse e Wide Pulse For access bursts only a GMSK Pulse filter is supported Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number FILTer on page 209 Tim
110. the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 113 11 5 4 11 5 4 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 113 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 113 Triggering Measurements Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured e Configuring the Triggering Conditlons oie renta kr aa 237 e Configuring the Trigger Output 242 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure the trigger for the GSM measure ment TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDOff ecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae ee eee serene enne nnns 238 TRIGG SEQu
111. the recorded UO pairs should be swapped I gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Try this function if the TSC can not be found Parameters State ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 123 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the data capture time Tip If you use an external trigger which indicates the frame start the minimum allowed capture time is reduced from 10 ms to 866 us Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Time gt Time in seconds In MSRA mode the RST value is 0 02 s Range 0 01s to 1s RST 0 1 Example SWE TIME 1s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Capture Time on page 123 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO State If enabled the capture time is determined according to the set statistic count with the objective of getting a fast measurement If disabled the capture time must be defined manually using SENSe SWEep TIME on page 245 Tip In order to improve the measurement speed further by using short capture times consider the following Use an external trigger which indicates the frame start In this case the minimum al
112. to a reference value with a specified value range per divi sion Per Division Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the value range to be displayed per division of the diagram 1 10 of total range Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 234 Ref Position Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the position of the reference value in percent of the total y axis range Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 289 Ref Value Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 289 7 2 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar lee EE M dagen 176 DIS ZOOME c 176 Restore Onginal DISplay 2 chit distil atin dienes 176 R Deactivating Zoom Selection model 176 Zoom Functions Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the curren
113. to limit the bandwidth of the demodulation measure ments and is described in the 3GPP standard document TS 45 005 for QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM as follows e araised cosine filter with roll off 0 25 and single side band 6 dB bandwidth 90 kHz for normal symbol rate and for higher symbol rate using narrow bandwidth pulse shaping filter e araised cosine filter with roll off 0 25 and single side band 6 dB bandwidth 108 kHz for higher symbol rate using wide bandwidth pulse shaping filter In addition to these filters a Measurement filter for GMSK is used in the R amp S FSW GSM application to limit the effects of out of band interference due to the high sample rate of 6 5 MHz which is used The magnitude responses of all the Measurement fil ters are shown in figure 5 11 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters Measurement Filters for different transmit filters Magnitude dB GMSK Pulse E Lin GMSK Pulse Narrow Pulse i Wide Pulse 1503 15 1 05 0 05 1 15 2 Frequency MHz Fig 5 11 Magnitude Responses of Measurement Filters for Demodulation Measurements Dependency of Slot Parameters The parameters that define a slot used for a GSM measurement are dependant on each other and only the following combinations of these parameters are available in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 6 3 2 3 Slot Settings on page 95 Table 5 5 Dependency of slot parameters Burst Type
114. trigger offset for external and IF power triggers are detected and automatically measured This function is not available in MSRA mode For details on the trigger offset refer to Trigger Offset on page 119 Remote command CONF AUTO TRIG ONCE see CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE on page 265 6 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements For multicarrier measurements some parameters defined by the GSM standard require a swept measurement with varying resolution bandwidths Thus a new sepa rate measurement is provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application to determine the wideband noise in multicarrier measurement setups see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Selecting the measurement type GSM measurements require a special operating mode on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key gt To select the MCWN measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the MC and Wide Noise Spectrum measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the MC and Wide Noise Spectrum measurement The measurement specific settings for the MC and Wide Noise Spectrum measure ment are available via the Overview o The MARKER FUNCT and LINES menus are currently not used e Default Settings for GSM MCWN Meas
115. 0 Set No of slots to measure 2 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL NOFS 2 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL OFFSet 0 Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence fsseesseses Configuring Data Acquisition Define a statistic count of 10 i e 10 GSM frames are evaluated statistically SENSe SWEep COUNt 10 Define a capture time for 10 statistic count 2 headroom GSM frames Capture Time 1042 frames 4 615 ms frame 0 0554 s Thus all 10 statistic count frames can be analyzed with a single capture SENSe SWEep TIME 0 0554 s Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI Query the maximum EVM value for slot 0 slot to measure in current GSM frame FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURR Programming Examples 0 62063819169998169 Query the maximum EVM value for slot 0 slot to measure in all 10 statistic count GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAX gt 0 76938760280609131 Query the averaged EVM RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 10 statistic count GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage 0 19639170169830322 11 13 3 Programming Example Measuring the Power for Access Bursts This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM power measurement of a GMSK modulated signal with access bursts in a remote environment 9595992 9 Prep
116. 0 1850 0 1910 0 1930 0 1990 0 1880 0 1960 0 80 MHz 512 810 1 For these frequency bands there is no fixed ARFCN to frequency assignment instead it is calculated with a formula taking an OFFSET parameter which is signaled by a higher layer of the network The given ARFCNs assume an OFFSET value of 0 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution Modulation modes Different modulation modes are used in the GSM mobile radio network The original GSM modulation is GMSK with the normal symbol rate NSR of approximately 270 833 ksymb s exactly 1625 6 ksymb s This corresponds to a bit rate of 270 833 kbit s The details are specified in chapter 2 of SGPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The 8PSK Phase Shift Keying modulation which is used within EDGE was intro duced to increase the data rate on the physical link It uses the same symbol rate the normal symbol rate as GMSK 270 833 ksymb s but has a bit rate of 3 x 270 833 kbit s exactly 812 5 kbit s In this method three bits represent a symbol The details are specified in chapter 3 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The 16QAM and 32QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation which are used in EDGE Evolution were introduced to further increase the data rate on the phys ical link They use the normal symbol rate 270 833 ksymb s but have bit rates of 4 x 270 833 kbit s or 5 x 270 833 kbit s respectively The de
117. 0 19639170169830322 Query the absolute mod spectrum table results 11 13 2 Programming Examples FETCH SPECtrum MODulation ALL 00 933200000 933200000 86 36 70 23 ABS PASSED Query the reference power of the mod spectrum FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence 11 13 11 13 30000 Sse eet Exporting Captured I Q Data Query the sample rate for the captured I Q data Note The returned value depends on Capture time SENSe SWEep TIME Mod frequency list CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect Therefore only query the sample rate afterwards TRACe TO SRATe 6500000 The number of samples can be calculated as follows floor CaptureTime 577 us SampleRate floor ls 577 us 6 5 MHz floor 6503750 5 6503750 samples Query the captured I Q data TRACel IQ DATA MEMory 0 6503750 Alternatively store the captured I Q data to a file MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM measurement of an AQPSK modulated signal in a remote environment Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt E EE Frequency and Level Set center frequ
118. 0 kHz RBW Default unit dBm Example FETC WSP REF POW Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Usage Query only Manual operation See Carrier Power Table on page 37 FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband INNer ALL This command queries the numeric results of the wideband noise measurement for the frequencies in the gap between the GSM carrier subblocks for non contiguous carrier allocation For details see Outer Wideband Table on page 43 For each limit line segment the following values are returned Return values lt StartFreqAbs gt lt StopFreqAbs gt lt WorstFreqRel gt lt WorstFreqAbs gt lt RBW gt lt PowerAtWorst gt lt LimitAtWorst gt lt AbsRelMode gt lt LimCheck gt Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results numeric value Absolute start frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric value Absolute stop frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier to the worst mea sured wideband noise result in this limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric value Absolute frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result regarding delta to limit in this limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement in this limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric v
119. 05 8 4 2 1 3 table a1 c4 5 See 3GPP TS 51 010 1 8 13 4 4 2 d and 3GPP TS 45 005 4 2 1 3 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL on page 315 READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate on page 316 Phase Error Displays the phase error over time R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Rs M EU RR eee a 5 Phase Error 1 Avg 2 Max e3 Min ed Clrw The following default settings are used for a Phase Error vs Time measurement Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot selected as Slot to Measure Averaging Configuration Number of frames as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check None Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PERR See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 297 Power vs Slot Displays the power per slot in the current frame and over all frames The result of the Power vs Time limit check is also indicated Note The power is measured for inactive slots but not for slots outside the slot scope see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 4 Power vs Slot NSP dBm dBm dB dBm dBm The following power values are determined a User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 27 GSM UO Measurement Results Table 4 7 Measured power values for Power vs Slot re
120. 1 Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or External and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 237 Retrieving Results Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that the useful part of the Slot to measure is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that the useful part of the Slot to measure is measured Example READ SPEC SWIT REF GAT Result 0 00000185076 0 00054277002 Usage Query only 11 8 8 Trigger to Sync Results The following commands are required to query the numeric results of a Trigger to Sync measurement For details on the individual results see Trigger to Sync Table on page 34 READ vs FETCh commands Note that two commands are provided for each result type which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command FETCH BURSEPTEMBplate TRGS AVERABge 2 e tte tat a ENNEN 327 FETCh BURStUPTEMplate TRGSICURRGN Reese Eege theta 327 FETCHBURSEPTEMplate TRG
121. 1 erre Ier titre erasers 17 EIER 67 H Hardware settings Displayed zs cet oct titer denen sontes 13 MEWN X 14 High pass filter une 220 RF input 103 147 Higher lee nct esent th rr remet een 46 62 globe t 49 378 HSR Higher symbol rate sese 46 49 Hysteresis TWIG QGP uie e eon ra ad e E TOi 120 159 l UO correlation threshold isasi siensia 130 UO data Export file binary data description 383 Export file parameter description EXP OING cet iio ner tle tease Mee EE PECORE Exporting Biel EE Exporting Importing Importing Importing remote Irporting EXporting aereo reo n nor nene kenne UO Power JTIEIGge E uctor ec ere puras lest mex og Deut enc T 118 Trigger level remote sess 240 SE 378 IF Power lee OF us tectis Trigger level remote Impedance Is ioc 221 iff TEES 103 Importing ef UO data remote SOftK6y s octo re io eh teo xc ha d delle duas Inner IM Table Result display usc onde onte es ton ees 38 Inner Narrow Band Table Result display ee tete e eet etc 40 Inner Spectrum Table Result display 35 35 ee tente e eer 42 Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 105 ele ue ele TE 2s Configuration remote Connector remote efe VT IIo rs Coupling Femme eu cator eet on Digital Baseband Interface settings Overload re
122. 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 176 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off _ um c Eccc D H3 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 294 11 8 11 8 1 Retrieving Results Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 176 See Restore Original Display on page 176 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 176 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results from the GSM measure ments EE ele ee 295 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACEens 299 e Magnitude Capture Results rte ree era Pe tod 302 e Modulation Accuracy Results meten cec ie rue de ARENS 303 e Modulation Spectrum Results 314 e Power vs Slot Results eene nnne nn nnn 317 e Transient Spectrum Results
123. 13 Narrowband noise results Result Description Offset MHz Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which distortion power is measured Freq MHz Absolute frequency of distortion product RBW kHz Resolution bandwidth used for measurement dB Relative power level to reference power measured at the distortion frequency dBm Absolute power level measured at distortion frequency A to Limit Power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate limit check failed If narrowband measurement is disabled this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH ONAR See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALL on page 337 Inner Wideband Table Similar to the Outer Wideband Table but the numeric results of the wideband noise measurement in the gap between the GSM carrier blocks for non contiguous carrier allocation are displayed The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements As for the Outer Wideband Table the Inner Wideband Table normally has one entry for every limit line segment the GSM standard 3GPP TS 51 021 defines in section 6 5 1 But in this table the middle of the gap between the 2 sub blocks is used to split up the results in an upper and lower part see ranges C an
124. 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 108 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters Mode RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle Manual operation See Microbutton Action on page 108 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Co
125. 3 UPP DATA Query number of exceptions of range A Counted number of exceptions CALC1 LIM5 EXC COUN CURR Maximum number of exceptions allowed to pass the exception check CALC1 LIM5 EXC COUN MAX Query number of exceptions of range B Counted number of exceptions CALC1 LIM6 EXC COUN CURR Maximum number of exceptions allowed to pass the exception check CALC1 LIM6 EXC COUN MAX Query limit check results Overall FETC SPEC MOD LIM FAIL Wideband noise CALC1 LIM1 FAIL Intermodulation 100 kHz RBW CALC1 LIM2 FAIL Intermodulation 300 kHz RBW CALC1 LIM3 FAIL Exception counting range A CALC1 LIM5 FAIL Programming Examples Exception counting range B CALC1 LIM6 FAIL List of abbreviations A Annex Reference A 1 A 2 A 2 1 A 2 2 A 1 List of abbreviatlons terret eege geen 378 UO Data File Format iq tar eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenenennnnneenn nnne 379 UO Parameter XML File Gpechicaton rannt rt tanne ern nente en nnn 380 IQ Data Binary File se uec rtr een te eet e rt ee AEEA 383 List of abbreviations 16QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 32QAM 32 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 3GPP 3 Generation Partnership Project 8PSK Phase Shift Keying with 8 phase states AQPSK Adaptive Quadrature Amplitude Modulation ARFCN Absolu
126. 3740234 24 647823333740234 24 647823333740234 0 1 0720701217651367 1 0720701217651367 1 0720701217651367 0 1 0720850229263306 1 0720850229263306 1 0720850229263306 0 9 8495550155639648 9 8495550155639648 9 8495550155639648 0 14 069089889526367 14 069089889526367 14 069089889526367 0 0 091422632336616516 0 091422632336616516 0 091422632336616516 0 101 05810546875 101 05810546875 101 05810546875 0 0 036366362124681473 0 036366362124681473 0 036366362124681473 0 76 698326110839844 76 698326110839844 76 698326110839844 0 112 8399658203125 112 8399658203125 112 8399658203125 0 0 083038687705993652 0 083038687705993652 0 083038687705993652 0 24 07130241394043 1 0950000286102295 14 060454368591309 Manual operation See Modulation Accuracy on page 21 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Amplitude Droop When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Amplitude Droop see ta
127. 5 4 where the value a is an angle related to the SCPIR as follows SCPIR g 20 log o tan a dB Q 1 D Se 0 0 JE MEI Auf a f a d d X A AR a 1 1 0 4 Fig 5 4 AQPSK constellation reproduced from 3GPP TS 45 004 5 5 Trigger settings The GSM measurements can be performed in Free Run untriggered mode how ever an external trigger or a power trigger can speed up measurements To perform measurements the R amp S FSW GSM application needs the frame start as a time refer ence The R amp S FSW GSM application searches for a frame start after every UO data acquisition The required search effort depends on the trigger mode Defining the Scope of the Measurement Consider the following trigger mode settings n Free Run mode i e without any trigger the R amp S FSW GSM application totally relies on the frame slot configuration to find the frame start The start of a measure ment is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started imme diately For an unambiguous frame configuration the GSM application searches for the frame start inside the captured UO data This is the slowest frame search mode With a Power Trigger the measurement is triggered by the power ramp of the received GSM bursts Nevertheless the R amp S FSW GSM application still relies on the frame slot configuration to find the frame start inside the captured UO data Once a measurement is c
128. 6 157 156 156 156 normal symbol periods 11 5 1 3 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements See 3GPP TS 51 0213GPP TS 51 021 and 3GPP TS 45 0103GPP TS 45 010 chapter 6 7 Timeslot length for further details This parameter is used to adjust the time for the Power vs Time masks of all slots The Slot to measure is used as the time reference for the entire frame Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 110 ON OFF RST ON Example CONF CHAN FRAM EQU OFF Manual operation See Equal Timeslot Length on page 94 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Slot The R amp S FSW GSM application is slot based Thus information on the expected slots of the input signal are required The following commands are required to provide this information CONFioureM lcCH AkNnel SL OTcNumberz FEl Ter 209 CONFioureM lcH AkNnel GL OTcNumberztSTaTel rnrn nn nnnennne 210 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYP6 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaaaeenenenenes 210 GONFigure MS CHANnelk SLOTS SCOP sirinin eda sco odes 211 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC USER eene 212 CONFioureM lcHAkNnel GL OTcez GUlBChannelcchzs Ter 212 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number TADVance essen 213 GONFigurep MS CHANnelSEOT amp SP TS teas ata eto Eee etant arena eoe exeat xe ERR ku Rs 213 CONFigur
129. 6 NSP 156 NSP 156 NSP 157 NSP 158 NSP 156 NSP 186 NSP 1884 RSP 1872 RSP 187 2RSP 1872 RSP 1884 RSP 1872 RSP 1872RSP 187 2 RSP Sep Siot 1 Slot 2 Sio 3 Slot 4 Sot 5 Slot 6 Sio 7 Middle cf Middie of Middle of Made of Middie af Midde of Middle of Midde of Midamble Midamble Midamble Midaenble Midamble Midamble Midarble Midamble 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 1875 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP Fig 5 19 Not equal top and equal bottom timeslot length criteria Note that since the reference point at the middle of TSC of each slot must coincide the length of the guard interval between successive bursts will depend on both the timeslot length and the symbol rate of bursts in successive slots As stated in the standard 3GPP TS 45 010 for the Equal Timeslot Length case if there is a pair of different symbol period bursts on adjacent timeslots then the guard period between the two bursts shall be 8 5 normal symbol periods which equals 10 2 reduced symbol periods For the Not Equal Timeslot Length case deriving the guard period length is some what more complicated and the possible values are summarized in Table 5 7 2 of 3GPP TS 45 010 reproduced below as Guard period lengths between different time slots for convenience Table 5 6 Guard period lengths between different timeslots Burst Transition G
130. 66 Performing Sweeps The commands required to perform sweeps are described in chapter 11 5 5 2 Configuring and Performing Sweeps on page 247 Analyzing GSM Measurements General analysis settings and functions concerning the trace markers windows etc are available for GSM measurement results e Configuring the Result DiSPlay sninn reete tatio nGeviadsdavnavediativeeneaeeiieee 273 e RESON COMMG EE 282 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 290 e Zooming Into the RE nier tt eee tetro et t i ve dee s 293 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here e General Window Commandes 274 e Working with Windows in the Display 274 Analyzing GSM Measurements 11 7 1 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application DISP lel jn 274 BISPlayEWINBoewesns E EE 274 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windo
131. 73 7 1 2 1 Individual Marker Settings In GSM evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Result Configuration Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Settings All Marker Off ist eulearetel 1 Code Domain Power Marker Selected MANOR 171 Marker LE 171 PCM EP 171 UI cB errr rrr re 172 Assigning the Marker to amp Tee uu cio ceret rtt xdi eee e aut di ee ecu dn 172 JU Markers QD esed tr pectet ertet ere gad exa Ti apex ee ca ete eed het rud e RERO T RR Us Fed Rees 172 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 285 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 285 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 342 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 343 Result Configuration Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note
132. AM 155 Access Burst GMSK 41 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number TYPE lt BurstT ype gt Specifies the type of the burst Suffix Number lt 0 7 gt Parameters for setting and query lt BurstType gt NB HB AB NB Normal Burst HB Higher Symbol Rate Burst AB Access Burst RST NB Example CONF CHAN SLOT TYPE NB Manual operation See Burst Type on page 97 11 5 1 4 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 Carrier The following commands are required to provide information on the carriers in the input signal CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c STATe esses 216 CONFioureM lMC Arer CAbRbler zc FREOuencn rernm 216 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c MTYPe eeesssssssssssseseee eene nennen nennt nnn 217 CONFloureM SlMC Arer EA Location 218 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier eeeeeeseeeeee 218 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt STATe This command queries the activity of the selected carrier Note to activate a carrier define its absolute frequency using CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency on page 216 Suffix lt c gt 1 16 Active carrier Return values lt State gt ON OFF RST OF
133. BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage sss nennen 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent essere nenne 309 FETCHBURGCMACCuracvlEREOuencv M ANimum eene nnne nnns 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation essen 309 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEREOuencv AVERage 309 READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent cessisse nnns nnn nahen inan 309 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFREOuencv MA Ximum enne nennen 309 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEREOuencv GDEViatpon esee 309 FETOCh BURG MAC Curacvl lOlMbalance AVEHRage nnne 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent sss 310 FETCH BURG MAC Curacvl lOiMbalance MANimum eene 310 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvl lOlMbalance GDtEViaton en enenerererernserenene nnn 310 READ BURG MAC CuracvltlOlMbalance AVERage rennen 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance CLRbent eere 310 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOlMbalance MA ximum nennen 310 READ BURG MAC CuracvltlOlMbalance GDEViaton eene 310 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvllOOFiset AVERage eene nennen 310 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent eeeessisessses senes tate tn NENNEN EEN 310 Retrieving Results FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvl lOOFfset MAXIMUM P esee nennen nnns 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset SGDEViaton ssion naeris 310 READ BURG MAC CuracvltlOOFtset AVEHRage nennen nnns 310 READ BURG MAC CuracvllOOFiset CURbent i orniaciriiiii idian isidin iiini 310 READ BURG MAC Curacvl
134. CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 248 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 249 Continue Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or
135. Culate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 287 Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum APEak on page 287 Y Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis in most graphical displays is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These settings are described here Y axis scaling is configured in the Result Config dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following nthe Overview select the Result Config button then switch to the Scaling tab ult Configuration Automatic grid scaling Traces Auto Marker Scaling Automat EE ON 175 Absolute Scaling Min Max EI nme arae eee 175 Relative Scaling Reference per Division 175 M ln ee en T TP 175 e dj 0 CTS 175 EAT D ETE 175 Zoom Functions Automatic Grid Scaling The y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement settings and results Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO on page 288 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values Define the scaling using absolute minimum and maximum values Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 288 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum on page 288 Relative Scaling Reference per Division Define the scaling relative
136. DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MINimum BISPlayEWINDows lt n gt TRAGestesE S TATe street ders en eme once Corrente eerie reete reno cierra DISPlayEWINDowsriz ZOOM AREA t riter e nre theater rtr e e cerner eta e npe eter EY TAS DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA essent eene nnennnene neret nnne DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe sess rennen nnne RUE Vue Ou Ree ER NC FETCh BURStPTEMplate TRGS AVERage ore irte inier dE D Fe En ea Pr UR ERR d 327 FETCH BURSUPTEMplat TRGS CURRENDU igron ia pna te eb oio er der ea SK erus SEEK Ur ERE SEE 327 FETCh BURSEPTEMplate IRGS MAXitmmUrrI iren t erret rrt n tree rtr rr ect ppc 327 FETCh BURStPTEMplate TRGS MINIMUM Pirincin eerte nrbt rt rhe n rennen TiTi 327 FETCH BURSEPTEMplate TIRGS SDEVIAlOFDI eese cereo mh Crate eer pene ngo PE tO SEU Pa EDEN e D FEY esa EE 327 FETCH BURSESPOWer SLOT s ALL AVERGage icti tete nnt nee ener ne E REPE dens 318 FETCH BURSESPOWerSLOT lt S gt ALL CRES U crinii aere ier inen nh reae REY FR SERE ERR EE Ene 318 FETCh BBURSESPOWer SEOTss AEL MAXIIUTI ocooo eara etr tp Erro er CET Edge 319 FETCh BURSESPOWer SLOT s CURRentAVERage ertt tentent n nn npa o Ge nnns 320 FETCh BURSESPOWer SLOTss CURRent CRESI Y 2 entree nec Re eii a ER erae 321 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT s CURRent MA vimum eene neret nee rennen nenne 322 FETCh BURSESPOWer S
137. E E T E 115 Re oT MIU MERE o T 115 ui ERN E I S 116 ei 116 BEC AED OT TD mM 116 IF VIDEO DEMOD Output This function is not available for the R amp S FSW GSM application IF Out Frequency This function is not available for the R amp S FSW GSM application Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 231 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel on page 243 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 243 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Se
138. E on page 245 INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 292 Remote commands exclusive to configuring and performing sweeps ABORT m 247 ll 248 INTiatesnes CONTINUOUS atero in read d eau cer ee eu e eno ar ana t Ced eee abc 248 IEN RTE AT 249 INlTlate nzfiMMedatel cece eaeaea ae ea eene nnne nnns n nnn tr srt at iterare rrr nr ns 249 IEN ie EE 250 INiTiate lt n gt SEQuencer MMediate cinsinin iana nia a enaa ania aa REEE 250 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE 22 ripae riri unaa an ara a a araa aa aa EEN 250 Essi sje mE 251 SENSe SWEep COUNL cette tentent tette ttt tet teet t test tt 251 SBENSe SWEep COUNECUFRRent 2 1 circo crt REENEN eroe eee ra eder ERAN 252 SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent sss rere ennt nennen nnns 252 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements If
139. EAD BURSEPTEMplate TRGS SDEWVialiofi 2 rtt eeepc debet d des ere a ibd pes 328 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALLiAVERAG retinere du tee net ire E RS 318 READ BURG GbOWer GL OT Glotz ALL CREGn ea oesiorsani esre rrearen Seaan oE ANENE RARS NENNE 318 READ BURSESPOWer SLOT sSIot ALL MAXimUmY critic nedi aeni 319 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURR nt AVERagoe A 320 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT sSlot CURRent CRESt esee 321 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT sSlot CURRent MAXimum essere 322 READ BURSESPOWer SLOT lt Slot DEL FatoSyriG nnrir ecrire ER ENNES 323 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL 0 0 eecceecseeeceeereeteeneeeeeceeeeeceseeecaeseesaeseeeaeeneeaeenteneeetenes 324 READ BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage essent nnne nne nne nne nee trn testen nena 307 READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent READ BURSI MACOCuracy ADRoop MAXimum sess eene nennen ener nns 307 READ BURSI MACGCuracy ADROoOp SDEYVialiori rtr ecrit rete Rog 307 READ B RSIEMAGGUracy ALL ci n eua uta a a TE rere ER Rae ER RO ben ru Eee uas 306 READ BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage sss renr eterni 308 READ BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent eese enne e nnne 308 READ BURG MACCuracvl BbOVWer MAXIMUM ecoisisasincgninro a naaa aan 308 READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation 308 READ BURSIE MAG Curacy FERROMAVERAQ6 wi
140. EOT s DELTatoSVIC ieo erret aaia 323 FETCRh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop AVERGag67 innert tne eto patre erae noa e ru ten Cannons 307 FETCRh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop CURER eGnt eret trt nent ener npe 307 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum esses nnne neret EAE 307 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation essere een rennen 307 FETCHh BURSIEMAGGuracy AEL aci cipere gere t eor rtp de eee ve cot pag tete c eas 306 FETGIEB RSIEMAGG racy BPOWer AVERag6 intet e cot t Er ce etre nue cbe urn 308 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent FETCh BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer MAXImUIm ciens rrt t ne tede ve deen DE ER ed 308 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation creen hti ai 308 FETCR BURSIE MACGuracy FERRor AVERaAgeT srcra prre trn rone Rr v RE RSS HEC IR ERR sg Cen 361 FETCHh BURSI IMAGCGCuracy FERROE CURROnt cte crece etn reet p gr Me dept edle 361 FETCH BURSIEMACC racy Ge Al ln RE 361 FETCRhIBURSIEMAGCGuracy FERRor SDEVIGtIOI einain tritt t torre rte parre a nee kd enn 361 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage 309 FETCIEB RSIEMAGCG racy EREQ Uency CURRORnE 1 tct re rcm RR ne ctp 309 FETCRh BURSI MACCuracy FRREQuency MAXimutm ucu ien noto ertet trennen eno serenas 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation eese enne nennen 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMba
141. F Example CONF MCAR CARR3 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Usage Query only Manual operation See Active carriers on page 101 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency lt AbsFreq gt This command defines or queries the absolute frequency of the selected carrier Suffix lt c gt 1 16 Active carrier Parameters lt AbsFreq gt Frequency in Hz RST 0 Example CONF MCAR CARR3 FREQ 1GHZ Example Manual operation Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 See Frequency on page 101 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe Modulation This command defines or queries the burst type and modulation of the selected carrier Suffix lt c gt Parameters lt Modulation gt Example Example Manual operation 1 16 Active carrier Frequency in Hz AGMSk Access burst GMSK modulation HN16qam Higher symbol rate burst narrow pulse 16 QAM modulation HN32qam Higher symbol rate burst narrow pulse 32 QAM modulation HNQPsk Higher symbol rate burst narrow pulse QPSK modulation HW16qam Higher symbol rate burst wide pulse 16 QAM modulation HW32qam Higher symbol rate burst wide pulse 32 QAM modulation HWQPsk Higher symbol rate burst wide pulse 16 QPSK modulatio
142. FSV K10 activating multi measurement mode using CONFigure MS MULTi STATe sets the Frequency List parameter to 1 8 MHZ see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 135 Deacti vating this mode sets the frequency list to 1 8 MHz sparse CONFigure MS BSEarch State This command toggles between active burst search and inactive burst search Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Use CONFigure MS SYNC MODE BURSt or CONFigure MS SYNC MODE ALL instead see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 254 Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 1 0 ON OFF ON Burst search on OFF Burst search off RST 1 CONFigure MS BSTHreshold lt Value gt This command changes the burst find threshold Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Due to the improved measurement capabilities of this GSM analysis software this remote control command and the function behind is not required any more Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Threshold for burst detection Default unit dB Example CONF BSTH 10 DB Mode GSM Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure MS MCARrier ACTCarriers lt NofActCarriers gt This parameter specifies the total number of active carriers of the multicarrier BTS to be measured Its value affects the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for
143. GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier Power Defines the maximum output power per carrier which determines the limit lines for the modulation spectrum UO measurements and MCWN measurement This value is ignored if CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO is ON Parameters Power maximum output power in dBm RST 0 dBm Example CONF POW PCAR AUTO OFF CONF POW PCAR 4 dBm Usage Query only Manual operation See Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measure ments only on page 92 CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO State If enabled the maximum measured power level for the carriers is used as the maxi mum output power per carrier If disabled the maximum power is defined by CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier on page 208 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF POW PCAR AUTO OFF CONF POW PCAR 4 dBm Usage Query only Manual operation See Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measure ments only on page 92 11 5 1 2 Frame Frame settings determine the frame configuration used by the device under test CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal eise nnne nnne 208 CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal State If activated all slots of a frame have the same length 8 x 156 26 normal symbol peri ods If deactivated slots number 0 and 4 of a frame have a longer duration all other a shorter duration compared to the equal slot length 157 156 156 15
144. Ge ios scorre EE e e REO RR FEE geed 316 FETCh SPEGCtrum MODUlation ALLE ieern t t rrt tt rette tene nr ro tre e epis 315 FETCh SPEGtrum SWITching REFer nceT EE 326 FETGh SPEGtmm SWITcehing AUD raiione eter Eee pee Fer YES Poet Ex Pee EY FUP eto oerte ke 325 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRodu cts INNer ALL iier ttr nnn e neret t 334 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts OUTer ALL 5 72 atr ttr a err rona eterne nes 335 FETCRh WSPectriumiMObBulatiohi REFereriCe coco rro cero creer epe e SEEEN np ee X Se e EFFI DEO coe Regn 363 FETCh WSPectrum MObDulation ALL 5 rtr rtp tr er e EE eee ne tp gre 362 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL 336 FETCh WSPectr mi NARROW OU REENEN 337 FETCh WSPectrum REFerence POWer AELT uciie tne trt enr rere ee eR Een nd a 338 FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband INNer ALI eene rire rr eren ri enne 339 FETCH WoPecthum WIDEband QU Ter ALI sconto tou itn tout yep utor cna GEES tono 341 FORMat DEXPort DSEPafalor rre mre re trente rre aec n need rr te Fe v RE Een 296 FORMatiDATA 295 INITiate DISPlay 249 dying me PD 248 IN Veli cates tin CONTINUOUS tee 248 INETiatesmis REFERS rentre rte erret eet EE E INC ERE eee rer ER t eee ARTI eR 292 INI Tiatesnz SEQUuencer ABORE iecore Eee AE creciente Eee Erde Fes 250 INlTlate
145. M Table Intermodulation Power Offset MHz Freq MHz Order RBW kHz dB dBm A to Limit 5 5 5 5 5 9 5 5 e C For each of the following regions the parameters described in table 4 12 are shown e frequencies to the left of the lowermost carrier e frequencies to the right of the uppermost carrier The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute IM frequency The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the lowermost carrier of the lower sub block and the uppermost carrier of the upper sub block Outer inner iil Outer IM j IM p Fig 4 2 Inner and outer intermodulation The following parameters are shown Table 4 12 Intermodulation results Result Description Offset MHz Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which intermodulation power is measured Freq MHz Absolute frequency of intermodulation product Order Order of intermodulation product RBW kHz Resolution bandwidth used for measurement dB relative power level to reference power measured at IM frequency dBm absolute power level measured at IM frequency A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate limit check failed um EP EIN NC MCN ae a User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 39 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements If Intermodulation is off this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH OIMP see LAYout ADD WINDo
146. M includes different modes GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution The terms EDGE and EDGE Evolution are used here only when there are significant differences between the modes In all other cases the term GSM is used Time domain vs frequency domain A TDMA Time Division Multiple Access and FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access scheme is used to transfer data in the GSM network This means that the digi tal information is transmitted discretely in the time domain mainly used to distinguish User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 46 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution between different users as well as in the frequency domain mainly used to distinguish between BTS Slots and frames The time domain is divided into s ots with a duration of 576 923 us exactly 3 5200 s 8 slots numbered 0 to 7 are combined into 1 frame with a duration of approximately 4 6154 ms exactly 3 650 s Multiframes and superframes Frames can be grouped into a multiframe consisting of either 26 for support traffic and associated control channels or 51 for all other purposes frames Multiframes can be grouped to superframes consisting of either 51 26 frame or 26 51 frame multiframes Multiframes and superframes are not of relevance for the physical measurements on the GSM system and thus not discussed in detail here A mobile phone therefore does not communicate continuously with the base station instead it communicates discre
147. NETWORK FREQ BAND 900 CONFigure MS POW CLAS NONE Configure 2 subblocks of carriers with 3 carriers each and a gap of 5 MHz CONF MS MCAR FALL NCON CONF MS MCAR CARRI1 CONF MS MCAR CARR2 CONF MS MCAR CARR3 nj REQ 935 MHZ REQ 935 6 MHZ REQ 936 2 MHZ m nj CONF MS MCAR CARRA CONF MS MCAR CARR5 CONF MS MCAR CARR6 nj REQ 941 2 MHZ REQ 941 8 MHZ REQ 942 4 MHZ el nj CONF MS MCAR FALL NCON GSAC 3 Normal burst 8PSK modulation CONF MS MCAR CARR1 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR2 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR3 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARRA4 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR5 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR6 MTYP N8PS Eegeregie Span and Level Set Ref Level to 30 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 0 DBM Set Ref Level Offset to 38 dB DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 38 DB Programming Examples Set frequency span to the Tx band 10 MHz automatically SENS FREQ SPAN MODE TXB SENS FREQ SPAN SENS FREQ STAR SENS FREQ STOP Result span 45 0 MHz 925 MHZ to 970 MHz O Configuring the reference measurement Configure the reference levels manually according to table 5 8 power level is 35 dBm CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF PLEV 35 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 30e3 27 3 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 100e3 31 2 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 300e3 33 3 zseBERESERBE Configuring the noise measurement
148. Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 243 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 243 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 243 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 243 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote com
149. Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt Channel PowerVs1 Min lt Arra SEX fl l ime yOfFloat length 256 gt oat 134 float oat 142 float efl oat 140 float ArrayOfFloat Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 float 70 float float 71 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max PowerVsTime Spectrum Min ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 133 float float 111 float A 2 2 UO Data File Format iq tar lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum g
150. ODulation LIMIT Mode This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Modula tion Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements This command is only available if one of the following result displays are selected see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 e Modulation Spectrum e Inner Outer Narrowband tables e Inner Outer Wide band tables Inner Outer Intermodulation tables Parameters for setting and query lt Mode gt ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example JI Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL I gt 0 933200000 933200000 108 66 65 00 ABS PASSED For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect lt Mode gt For Modulation Spectrum Table measurements this command controls whether offset frequencies are measured up to 1800 kHz or 5800 kHz Parameters for setting and query lt Mode gt NARRow The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 1 8 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 6 5 MHz NSParse More compact version of NARRow The sample rate is 6 5 MHz WIDE The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrie
151. PAN on page 267 Start Stop Defines the start and stop frequencies The following range of values is allowed fmin s start s fmax Span min fmin SPanmin s Fstop s fmax fmin fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 268 SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 268 Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically In Manual mode the frequency span is defined by a Start Stop or a Center Fre quency and Span If the Auto span mode is enabled default the span for the MCWN measurement is set to one of the following values automatically 6 4 4 3 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Tx Band The span for the MCWN measurement is set to the Tx band 10 MHz for multicarrier BTS device types or 2 MHz for all other device types The Tx bands are defined in the standard in 3GPP TS 45 005 chap ter 2 Frequency bands and channel arrangement This setting is recommended for measurements according to the standard Carriers 1 8 MHz The span is set to the span of all active GSM carriers plus a margin of 1 8 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for narrowband noise measurements Carriers 6 MHz The span is set to the span of all active GSM carriers plus a margin of 6 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for all narrowband noise and most of the wide band noise and intermodulation measurements Remote command SENSe FREQu
152. Parameters lt MeasType gt IQ Default UO measurement to determine the modulation accuracy modulation transient spectrum trigger parameters etc MCWNoise Sweep measurement to determine noise and intermodulation in multicarrier setups RST IQ Example CONF MEAS MCWN 11 5 11 5 1 11 5 1 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements The following commands are required to configure a default GSM UO Modulation Accuracy measurement on an R amp S FSW in a remote environment Ee NERT le EE 203 e npub Out SO TOS ecc cereo etri er rct opa d e Ern ect nd tent 218 e Frontend GORTIGUESUOID ARENS 231 Triggering Measurements eere e E 237 e Data A TE e BEE 244 E Ree Ee ET 252 We uinci 258 e Adjusting Settings Automatically cccccecscecessesececeeessneteceeseeeteseeeneneeeeeensntees 264 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes frame detection and measurement e Device under Test Settings uii tides iere Re ELLE a 203 GL 208 b oo ED TES 209 NES OI TEE 216 Device under Test Settings The type of device to be tested provides additional information on the signal to be expected CONFigure MS EDEVice tTYBE n aita crt coti na ee cet eee
153. Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 103 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported For Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN measurements only RF input is allowed Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface For details on UO input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Digital UO Input State on page 104 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 106 11 5 2 2 Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Useful commands for digital UO data described elsewhere INP SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 221 TRIGger SEQue
154. R amp SSFSW K10 GSM Measuremen User Manual Current 1173 9263 02 11 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 22 and higher R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000K08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 R amp S FSWS85 1312 8000K85 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K10 1313 1368 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde A Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S9FSW K10 Contents Contents E ooi e
155. RST ON Manual operation See Automatic Grid Scaling on page 175 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 175 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 175 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines th
156. S MAXIPWIIU 1 222 30a Rhe e sexu teen re Ronan qe nca qeu a Eiaa 327 FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MlNimum isis nennen nennen nens 327 FETCh BURStPTEMplate TRGS SDEVIatiQn 2 rere acces a EENS ricus 327 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS AVERage ene ceeeininn rte a nmn tnn i is nean nA Ran aa 327 READBURGGCbTEMpolate TRGG CUb bent cece ee eeeeeeaeaeaeaaeaaaeteteeteseeeseeeeeees 327 READ BURSEPTEMplate TROS MAXIMUM Pecce AANEREN EA EENS 327 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS MINim m 2 iacit oue enean ce ctus a EEN cotes eere dede 328 READ BURSEPTEMplalte IRGS SDEVIationj arr torre e eet ex SES 328 FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERage FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MINimum FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEViation READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERage READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum 11 8 9 Retrieving Results READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MINimum READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEViation This command starts a Trigger to Sync measurement and reads out the time between the external trigger event and the start of the first symbol of the TSC This command is only available if an external trigger is selected and the Trigger to Sync measurement is active see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 and Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 Return values Result numeric value Trigger to Sy
157. SAC 7 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only on page 101 Input Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The following commands are required to configure data input and output LOUP erie evel hee adit enh hd adie ea 219 e Configuring Digital UO Input and Output 222 e Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface 225 s SOMME ap ele 228 e Configuring Ihe OUIDUIS o rccte Or ee vetrine eere Cer eed eda en usd 231 11 5 2 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements RF Input INbPutATTenuaton PbOTechonHtEzet 219 lge el MES 219 INPURG OUP roo e GE 219 INPUT DRAT aate n E HN 220 INPaEFIETeEPHPASSESTAT scent terere te oo Re ree ete ree dane 220 INPULPIL Ter VIGES TAM T 221 INPutIMPedatnce ri ee EAR 221 dl 221 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD messa
158. SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 115 11 5 3 Frontend Configuration The following commands are required to configure frequency and amplitude settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup GE e 231 E le E e eee tergo it e dide pnt n HR us Rte teat aden 233 s Configuring Ri TE EE 235 11 5 3 1 Frequency The following commands are required to configure the frequencies to measure Useful commands for configuring frequencies described elsewhere CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 205 CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 204 Remote commands exclusive to configuring frequencies GONFigureD MS ARE ciun ru tra pde eo ae ena tete cnet E vx RE eo E eate eu exe E ERR unde 232 Ee ee KR 232 ISENSeJPRSEOUsnc GENTO STEP crai ene tope aerea e dE nea i aed 232 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO cette tenente tette 233 E El el EE 233 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS ARFCn lt Value gt This command specifies the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number ARFCN to be measured Setting the ARFCN updates the frequency Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Range 0 to 1023 some values may not be allowed depending on the selected frequency band Default unit NONE Example CONF ARFC 5 Manual op
159. SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO NUMB 2 Manual operation See Carrier Selection Carrier on page 164 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer lt CarrNo gt This command specifies the carrier at which the reference powers for the MCWN mea surement are measured if reference power measurement is enabled see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 270 Parameters lt CarrNo gt Number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Range 1 16 RST 1 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS ON CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO NUMB 2 Manual operation See Carrier Selection Carrier on page 164 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure State This command specifies whether a reference power measurement is performed Parameters State ON OFF ON The reference powers of all active carriers are measured for MCWN measurements OFF the reference powers must be defined manually see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel on page 270 RST ON Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF Manual operation See Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 163 See Defining Reference Powers Manually on page 164 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel Level This command defines the reference power level for MCWN measurements if no ref
160. Select the Result Config button to configure settings for specific result displays These settings can be configured individually for each window so select the win dow first and then configure the settings e Define the Traces to be displayed in the window Optionally configure the trace to display the average over a series of measure ments If necessary increase the Statistics Count in the Sweep Config dia log box e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Adapt the diagram scaling to the displayed data 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 9 2 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 1 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e Fora
161. Sy xc testa ae tueatur Ease get LC Re cs ERR ER Ere DUREE PARERE E 151 Reference E8val oi cere reete dri ae ve cr vena eae EQ E e cd 151 L Shifting the Display Offset 152 Mechanical Attenuatton 152 L Attenuation Mode value cene enne stent 152 Using Electronic Altenuatilon iioii eret eco tie e cte E ore ELE SERERE RAE 152 PN EE SUNOS E EE 153 Fe aA RR 153 Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 206 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 234 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic le
162. T creta dentato read crate eo tre tn ene te tete tesa 226 INPut IO F LEscale AUT e EE 226 eise Tee E HEIRAT 226 MURTO A eege QU I T I EID 227 CALibrauon ATQ THAT MING FS TANG uicta Eua deor nee tuere 227 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 single ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Single ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input Configuration on page 107 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to 1NPut I0 FULLscale LEVel on page 226 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see INPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 226 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements INP IQ FULL 0 5V
163. TIming S DAT acria etae na ott e prom roe ep oe aee kt ERES D kN E YER EEEE vat eret veu ph curate GONFigure BURSEETIMe IMMediate 2 nri tnr ren trn tert rete CONFigure BURSt MACCuracy IMMediate GONFigure BURSEMERROrI EIMMediate con enitn ut et too epa eran te pater rp enero t peat roe a ROVRO E GONFigure BURSEPFERror IMMedi te 2 rrt rere n nte tr rente trenes GONFigure BURSEPTEMMplate F ILE TEF irisi 1 rti inrer rte eerte ba ki ENAT On o tira on Ee ee lee Te ag le CONFigure BURSEPTEMplate TALIM sirve nro rte rre er nr EE ENEE GONFigure BURStPTENMMplate IMMediate 2 ntt trt aa CONFigure MEASurement CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder GONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXGeption S TATe 6 ttn rne nt enn nni etn 272 CONFigure SPEC trum EIMIt BE scooter rettet arg uo xt ee Eege 260 GONFigure SPECtrum LIMIEtRIGEIE sauce ror rore treten nt PE Fere dr a E pF TENTER EIS 260 GONFigure SPECtrum MObDulation L MIT cach ntt rn tnra ent e enne nro erben rt attendees 261 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNtE essen enne 269 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBar esee 269 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier AUTO eene 269 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure essen nennen 270 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEV el entent
164. TS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 206 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 234 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep
165. TYPE BTSNormal CONFigure MS MTYPe lt Value gt This command sets the modulation type of all slots Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Parameters for setting and query Value GMSK EDGE Modulation type RST GMSK Example Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Old FS K5 commands CONFigure MS MTYPe EDGE Please use the following K10 commands instead I K5 GMSK gt K10 GMSK I K5 EDGE gt K10 PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0O MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 MTYPe PSK8 Old FS K5 commands CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe Il gt GMSK Please use the following K10 commands instead CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure gt 0 This is the slot number of the slot to measure JI Set and query the modulation of the slot to measure CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 MTYPe gt GMSK Mode GSM CONFigure MS POWer AUTO ONCE This command is used to perform an auto level measurement immediately Note that
166. The I Q data to be evaluated in the GSM application Modulation Accuracy measure ment only can not only be captured by the GSM application itself it can also be impor ted to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the GSM application can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the LI Save or EN Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual e QGotfig ralorm OVOpViBW cce eer aona naa tec Doct retinet erg A be dra 88 e Signal Descnpltione use n rei i he ee C ei dd ena 90 e Input Output and Frontend Settings rorem ern 101 i e OST SUNS acess selec cee ec Seene sap eset eae 116 e Dat e m E 121 DSO GUANO 2 urere ren peter t epa nent ree RR RS 126 e Measurement Geitings nennen entente nennen 131 e Adjusting Settings Automatically ccc ence teen enda 137 6 3 4 Configuration Overview E H Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important Cm J currently defined settings is provided in the Overview Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Note that the configuration Overview depends on the selected measurement type Configuration for multicarr
167. Time alignment 54 65 Useful pat 5 e ten trecenta 326 softkey remote Control 3 rerit niin 271 Softkeys Amplitude Config Auto Freq Auto Level ius Capture Offset iriiritia tain entere e Continue Single Sweep ss issiiiissriinsiesiiiiisissi 125 162 Continuous Sequencer essssesesssseseesersrsessrnerressrees 86 Continuous Sweep 125 161 Display Config 3n 0f 340 P E 178 External 118 157 Free RUF te oriretur resta eier 117 157 Frequericy CONTIG err eterne rtt 109 Frequency Config MCWN 147 le POWGP eet 241118 IF Power 158 huj d 178 Input Source CONFIG rene 101 145 Input Frontend 101 145 ege dE 178 IQ Import wes 170 Marker Config sxe 1 0 Marker to Trace wi lec ER Norm Della eie eec ererr aa aaie Outputs Config S Peak riisiin eite aeta te AE 173 Power NEE 119 Preamp 114 153 Ref Level hd eese e ed veda 112 151 Ref Level Offset ees 112 152 PROTOS ME 125 RF Atten Auto 113 152 RF Atteri Manual se 113 152 IRE Ge EE 118 158 Select Market eene ege dederit 173 IIl 86 Single Geouencer A 86 Single Sweep 125 162 Span Mantel tziatan teri tette 149 SUA cb hh 149 SOP M 149 Tiff tiene 119 Trace 1 2 3 4
168. UO data includes magnitude and phase information which allows the R amp S FSW GSM application to demodulate signals and determine various characteristic signal parame ters such as the modulation accuracy power vs time modulation and transient spec trum in just one measurement For multicarrier measurements some parameters required by the GSM standard require a frequency sweep with varying resolution bandwidths Thus a new separate measurement is provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application to determine the wide band noise in multicarrier measurement setups For details on selecting measurements see Selecting the measurement type on page 85 e GSM UO Measurement Resuhte esee enne nnne nens 17 e Multicarrier Wideband Noise Meaeuremente eene 34 GSM I Q Measurement Results The I Q data that was captured by the default GSM Modulation Accuracy etc mea surement can be evaluated using different methods All evaluation methods available for the GSM measurements are displayed in the selection bar in SmartGrid mode To activate SmartGrid mode do one of the following Ed Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display button in the configuration Overview e Select the Display Config softkey from the MEAS CONFIG menu Press the MEAS key For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual By default the GSM measurement results for UO measurements are displayed in the f
169. YPE ean a a E RENE 281 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MACC Adds a Modulation Accuracy display to the right of window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation Analyzing GSM Measurements See Constellation on page 18 See EVM on page 18 See Magnitude Capture on page 19 See Magnitude Error on page 20 See Marker Table on page 21 See Modulation Accuracy on page 21 See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 S
170. a measurement to be performed See Selecting the measurement type on page 85 6 4 3 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes frame detection and measurement 6 4 3 1 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements The Signal Description settings are available from the configuration Overview Device Under Test E le E 142 LUE EE CEET 144 Device Under Test Settings The type of device to be tested provides additional information on the signal to be expected The device settings are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Signal Description button then switch to the Device tab Device Carriers Device Under Test Device Type Multicarrier BTS Wide Area Frequency Band Power Class None Maximum Output Power per Carrier Value 50 0 dBm N CaS TYDE ces a S S A S S 142 Frequency TT EE 143 xoc cmm 143 Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measurements only 143 Device Type Defines the type of device under test DUT The following types are available e BTS Normal e BTS Micro e BTS Pico e MS Normal e MS Small e Multicarrier BTS Wide Area e Multicarrier BTS Medium Range e Multicarrier BTS Local Area The default device type is BTS Normal Remote command CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 203 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements
171. a only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 8 Select the Reference measurement button to determine how the reference pow ers are determined Do one of the following e Enable automatic measurement with automatic carrier selection User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 187 How to Measure Wideband Noise in Multicarrier Setups e Enable automatic measurement and select a carrier to be used for reference e Disable the reference measurement and define the power level and the three reference power levels for 30 kHz 100 kHz 300 kHz RBW see also chap ter 5 15 3 Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Measurements on page 75 9 Select the Measurement button and define which of the noise and intermodula tion measurements are to be performed If necessary increase the number of measurements to be performed for averaging Average count 10 Select the Display Config button and select up to 16 displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 12 Select the Result Config button to configure settings for specific result displays These settings can be configured individually for each window so select the win dow first and then configure the settings e Configure markers and delta m
172. able allows you to display the remaining bits The currently selected bit number is indicated in the center of the scrollbar Table 6 1 Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal GMSK 26 Normal 8PSK 78 Normal 16QAM 104 Normal 32QAM 130 Higher Symbol Rate QPSK 62 Higher Symbol Rate 16QAM 124 Higher Symbol Rate 32QAM 155 Access GMSK 41 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC USER on page 214 AQPSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER on page 212 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings The Carrier settings define whether the expected signal contains a single or multiple carriers Up to 16 carriers can be configured for a single MCWN measurement Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Carrier settings are available from the Signal Description dialog box which is dis played when you select the corresponding button in the configuration Overview Signal Description Device Carriers Carrier Allocation Non Contiguous Gaz start altencarnier kr Carrier Active Frequency Modulation 1 935 0 MHz NB GMSK 2 935 6 MHz NB GMSK 3 936 2 MHz NB GMSK 4 936 8 MHz NB GMSK The carriers can also be configured automatically see Adjusting the Center Fre quency Automatically Auto Freq on page 137 Camer AIIOGSUOIN 1 ricorrere
173. aeneaeaes 329 CAL Culate nz LlMitks EAIL esie esee nennen nnne nnne nnn rennes nnn ns 329 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks LOwWerl DATAI eene nennen nennen nnne nnn n 331 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer DATAJ ueseseeeseeee nennen nennen nnne nennt 331 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA This command queries the x values of the limit specified line Suffix lt k gt 1 2 3 4 The limit line to query 1 upper limit line for MCWN wideband noise limit 2 lower limit line PvT Full Burst only for MCWN intermodulation limit at 100 kHz 3 MCWN only intermodulation limit at 300 kHz 4 MCWN only narrowband noise limit Return values lt LimitLinePoints gt For PvT Full Burst display Time in seconds For Modulation Spectrum Graph or Transient Spectrum Graph result displays relative frequency in Hz For Spectrum Graph result displays absolute frequency in Hz Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of the limit check of the limit line indicated in the selected measurement window Note that a complete sweep must have been per formed to obtain a valid result A synchroniz
174. ailable when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result numeric value Crest factor Default unit dB Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent CRESt Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent MAXimum READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent MAXimum This command starts the measurement to read out the maximum power for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only ava
175. al I Q signal of the given TSC and the measured TSC is below the UO correlation threshold then the application reports Sync not found in the status bar Additionally such bursts are ignored if Measure only on Sync is activated Note If the R amp S FSW GSM application is configured to measure GMSK normal bursts a threshold below 97 will also accept 8PSK normal bursts with the same TSC for analysis In this case activate Measure only on Sync and set the I Q Correla tion Threshold to 9796 This will exclude the 8PSK normal bursts from the analysis Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC IQCThreshold on page 256 Symbol Decision The symbol decision determines how the symbols are detected in the demodulator Setting this parameter does not affect the demodulation of normal bursts with GMSK modulator For normal bursts with 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM or AQPSK modulation or higher symbol rate bursts with QPSK 16QAM or 32QAM modulation use this parame ter to get a trade off between performance symbol error rate of the R amp S FSW GSM application and measurement speed Auto Automatically selects the symbol decision method 6 3 7 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Linear Linear symbol decision Uses inverse filtering a kind of zero forcing filter and a symbol wise decision method This method is recommen ded for high symbol to noise ratios but not for higher symbol rate bursts with a narrow pulse The inverse filter col
176. alid for PGSM EGSM RGSM and TGSM 1800 1800 MHz band valid for DCS 1900 1900 MHz band valid for PCS RST 900 Example CONF NETW FREQO 380 Example For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Frequency Band on page 91 CONFigure MS POWer CLASs Value This command the power class of the device under test Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 1 2 314 51 6 7 8 E1 E2 E3 M1 M2 M3 P1 NONE 1 MS and BTS power class 1 2 MS and BTS power class 2 3 MS and BTS power class 3 4 MS and BTS power class 4 5 MS and BTS power class 5 6 BTS power class 6 7 BTS power class 7 8 BTS power class 8 E1 MS power class E1 E2 MS power class E2 E3 MS power class E3 M1 BTS power class M1 Micro M2 BTS power class M2 Micro M3 BTS power class M3 Micro P1 BTS power class P1 Pico NONE No power classes defined RST 2 Example CONF POW CLAS 1 Example For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Power Class on page 92 Configuring and Performing
177. also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 For details on the measurement types see chapter 4 1 GSM UO Measurement Results on page 17 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure on page 253 Number of Slots to measure This parameter specifies the Number of Slots to measure for the measurement inter val of multi slot measurements i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum mea surements Between 1 and 8 consecutive slots can be measured See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots on page 253 First Slot to measure This parameter specifies the start of the measurement interval for mulit slot measure ments i e Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary The following conditions apply e First Slot to measure lt Slot to Measure e Slot to Measure s First Slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet on page 253 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure This area shows a graphical representation of the configuration of each slot Select a slot to display its Slot dialog box see chapter 6 3 2 3 Slot Settings on page 95 For active slots the following information is shown e The burst type e g Normal NB
178. alue Absolute or relative power level to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB ABS REL Indicates whether absolute or relative power values are returned depending on CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT on page 261 Result of the limit check in this limit line segment PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit FETC WSP WID INN Query only See Inner Wideband Table on page 42 Retrieving Results FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband OUTer ALL This command queries the resultsof the wideband noise measurement below the low est and above the highest carrier but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier alloca tion For each limit line segment the following values are returned Return values lt StartFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute start frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz lt StopFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute stop frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz lt WorstFreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier to the worst mea sured wideband noise result in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt WorstFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result regarding delta to limit in this limit line seg
179. amp S FSW GSM application The burst type e g Norm for a normal burst The modulation e g GMSK The training sequence TSC and Set or Sync for access bursts 5 7 Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application The R amp S FSW GSM application requires a number of filters for different stages of sig nal processing These include the Multicarrier filter for multicarrier base station mea surements only the Power vs Time filter and the Measurement filter A signal flow diagram is shown in figure 5 7 to illustrate where the different filters are used Synchronization Transient Spectrum Measurements Demod Measuremnts Reference Signal Generation Measurement Filter Modulation Spectrum Measurements Fig 5 7 Signal flow diagram highlighting filtering operations 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see PvT Full Burst on page 28 The following filters are available Single carrier filters e 1 MHz Gauss e 500 kHz Gauss e 600 kHz Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application Multicarrier filters e 400 kHz MC e 300kHz MC The magnitude and step responses of the different Power vs Time filters are shown in figure 5 8 and figure 5 9 respectively In general the smaller the filter bandwidth the worse the step response becomes in terms of ringing effects an
180. an be formed using TSCs from Set 1 on the first subchannel and TSCs from either Set 1 or Set 2 on the second subchannel In case a TSC from Set 2 is used it should match the TSC from Set 1 i e TSC lt n gt from Set 1 on subchannel 1 should match TSC lt n gt from Set 2 on subchannel 2 for n 0 7 TSC vs Midamble The terms TSC and Midamble are used synonymously in the standard In this docu mentation we use the term TSC to refer to the known symbol sequence in the middle of the slot The R amp S FSW GSM application supports measurement of the following signals e GMSK bursts using the TSCs from Set 1 or Set 2 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 50 AQPSK Modulation e AQPSK bursts with combinations of TSCs from Set 1 and 2 on the subchannels e AQPSK bursts with a user specified SCPIR The following measurements of the above signals are supported Power vs Time e Demod Modulation Accuracy EVM vs Time Phase Error vs Time Magnitude Error vs Time Constellation e Spectrum modulation transient including limit check Automatic trigger offset detection Restriction for auto frame configuration Auto Frame configuration only detects AQPSK normal bursts where the subchannels have a TSC according to table 5 3 The SCPIR value is detected with a resolution of 1 dB To obtain reliable measurement results on AQPSK normal bursts compare the auto detected slot settings with the settings of your device under test Table 5 3 R
181. an be set to a specific characteristic value automatically Useful commands for frequency settings described elsewhere CONFigure MS ARFCn on page 232 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 232 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 232 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 233 Remote commands exclusive to frequency settings in MCWN measurements EE eu SPAN E 267 SENSES FREQUENCY SPAN MODE rar etie etre euge t bee dade to reddam eene adel 267 SENSe PREQUency STARE E 268 SENSe FREQUEN STOP ente a Aa aa aa E D NE RRERRRRO Miete dexR RDUM ERU RD SERT dE 268 SENSe FREQuency SPAN Span This command defines the frequency span Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Span on page 149 SENSe FREQuency SPAN MODE Mode This command sets the span for the MCWN measurement to a predefined value Parameters Mode TXBand The span for the MCWN measurement is set to the TX band 2 MHz for single carrier BTS or MS or 10 MHz for multicar rier BTS device types CNARrow The span is set to the span of the active carriers plus a margin of 1 8 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for narrowband noise measurements CWIDe The span is set to the span of the active carriers plus a margin of 6 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for narrowband noise and most of the wideband noise and intermodulation measurements MANual the frequency span is defined by a start and stop frequ
182. and perform GSM measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes e List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual Documentation Overview e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Get
183. and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency 5 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Spectrum measurements e Formulticarrier base stations define which carriers are measured the left most carrier only Enable Left Limit ON the right most carrier only Enable Right Limit ON all carriers Enable Left Limit ON Enable Right Limit ON e Select the type of resolution filter to be used For measurements strictly according to standard use the Normal 3dB filter e Select the frequency list to be used to determine the modulation spectrum For a quick overview select a sparse list for a conformance test use the list specified by the stan
184. anual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 125 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 250 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 125 INITiate DISPlay State This command turns the display update during single sweep measurements on and off Parameters Sta
185. application esses 56 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters ceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneen nennen nnne nnn 59 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period esee nennen nnn nnns 60 e Eu WE lee BE 63 5 14 WTimeslot Alignmerit eerte ener ee eire eee 65 5 12 Delta to Sync Values eue eere hne eee tee eret erit rie 68 5 13 Limit Checks E 69 5 14 Impact of the Statistic COUN ccccceseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseesseaneeeeeeeeeeees 70 5 15 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise eeeeeeeeeeenneennnnnenen nnne nnn nnn 71 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnnenennn nennen nnne nnn nennt 82 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenennenenn nennen nennen nn 82 6 C nfigu rati M sss 85 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 3 R amp S9FSW K10 Contents 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 7 1 7 2 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function 85 Display Configuratlon 12 einer aiunt ocu n nnns sunu ann Ru sinu na aR RR RRR RAE ERR Ran RR RRRR Ria 87 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration eene 87 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Mea
186. apture remote 901 302 Magnitude Error remote sssssss 300 MCWN Spectrum Graph remote 302 Modulaiton Accuracy remote ussss 303 Modulation Spectrum Graph remote 301 Modulation Spectrum Table remote lt 914 per slot ierit s 133 Phase Error remote 300 Power vs Slot remote 917 PvT Full Burst remote 901 Referenc Der ecce retener es 127 Reference slot orent net reete 127 Result summary 2 209 Trace data query remote 209 Transient Spectrum remote 301 Transient Spectrum Table remote 325 Trigger to Sync remote 2901 Updating the display nete 125 Updating the display remote ssssse 292 RF attenuation JUL utet HU nderit 113 152 Mahal xin cana DER ets 113 152 RFE INDU noires 102 146 Connector remote rne rete teta 219 Overload protection remote ssssssss 219 E ue 219 221 RF Power E 118 158 Trigger level remote esee 240 RUN CONT KOY 125 161 RUN SINGLE cp atest e n 125 162 S Sample Tale ete eot Detto CE encre eius Digital 1 Q Digital UO remote Optimizing EI ue EE Scaling Automatic citi cerea cra oh need 175 MESI 174 175 SCPIR i
187. aring the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt ees e Frequency and Level Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM 95959295 2 2 22 Slot 0 configuration Activate slot 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO STATe ON Normal Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TYPE NB GMSK modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe GMSK TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC 0 1 ac a Slot 1 configuration Activate slot 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON Access Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE AB Set TSO Programming Examples CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC TSO Query TS CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC TSO Access burst has a timing advance offset from slot start of 1 symbol CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TADV 1 essecesese Slot 2 7 configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF tt Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 1 slot to measure for single slot measurements
188. arker Table on page 21 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the GSM application can not only be measured by the GSM application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the GSM application can be exported for further analysis in external applications For details on importing and exporting UO data see chapter 8 I Q Data Import and Export on page 177 MMEMory WOADIG S TAT Gs etc eio ee a e b Gadi du teca E 344 MMEMory STORe n 1Q COMMenl EE 345 MMEMory STORG lt NF 1Q STATC arianne a aE nnan R Eaa RARE 345 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iqw Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data iqw Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See 1 Q Import on page 178 11 10 Status Reporting System MMEMory STORe n IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file
189. arkers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Adaptthe diagram scaling to the displayed data 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 10 10 1 10 2 Improving Performance Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results of a GSM measurement do not meet your expectations try the following recommendations to optimize the measurement e improving FerforffiSliGO ua sarees terete etre e Vena etie ee rode Fore Uc epu eae 189 e Improving EVM ACOA occon cete rte Lec Eee a e teta 189 e Optimizing Limit CHECKS EE 190 Sco dieere PIC TIU m 191 Improving Performance If the GSM measurement seems to take a long time try the following tips Using external triggers to mark the frame start The R amp S FSW GSM application needs the frame start as a time reference It either searches for a frame start after every UO data acquisition or relies on a trigger event that marks the frame start An external trigger or a power trigger that mark the frame start can speed up measurements See also chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 In MSRA mode trigger events are not considered when determining the frame start in a GSM measurement as the trigger is defined by the MSRA Master for all applications simultaneously and most li
190. ate an average thus ensuring stable reference values Usually a small average count 10 12 is sufficient to obtain suitable results for the reference measurement If this reference measurement is disabled user defined reference values are used for relative results in the final measurement Narrowband noise measurement If enabled the narrowband noise is measured next Narrowband noise measurement is only available for multicarrier device types see Device Type on page 91 for which at least 2 carriers are configured see chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 This measurement consists of zero span sweeps at a number of defined offset fre quencies for each active carrier That means UO data is captured at all relevant outer most carriers i e 2 carriers for contiguous 4 for non contiguous carrier allocation one after another From this UO data all slots and timing information are determined At each determined slot a gated zero span measurement with an RBW and VBW of 30 kHz is performed using the same I Q data Measurement time is from 50 to 90 of the useful part of the time slot excluding the mid amble Measurement offsets are 400 kHz 600 kHz and 1200 kHz either below or above the outermost carrier Multicarrier and Wideband Noise If no slots are found the results are invalid due to an invalid measurement setup and a warning is displayed in the status bar Several narrowband noise measurements can be perf
191. ate tabs and you can switch between the tabs to compare the results Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function For example you can activate one GSM measurement channel to perform a GSM modulation accuracy measurement for an unknown signal and a second channel to perform a multicarrier measurement using the same GSM input source Then you can monitor all results at the same time in the MultiView tab The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed on the R amp S FSW at any time If one mea surement is running and you start another or switch to another channel the first mea surement is stopped In order to perform the different measurements you configured in multiple channels you must switch from one tab to another However you can enable a Sequencer function that automatically calls up each activa ted measurement channel in turn This means the measurements configured in the channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 8 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the corresponding tab as well as the Multi View as the measurements are performed Sequencer operation is independent of the currently displayed tab for example you can analyze the SEM measurement while the modulation accuracy measurem
192. ates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 199 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 199 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional UO Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace Activating GSM Measurements lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 199 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is
193. ation with OPC OPC Or WAI should therefore be provided Suffix lt k gt Return values lt Result gt Example Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results 1 2 3 4 The limit check to query 1 Max trace gt upper limit line for MCWN wideband noise 2 Min trace gt lower limit line PvT Full Burst only for MCWN intermodulation at 100 kHz 3 MCWN only intermodulation at 300 kHz 4 MCWN only narrowband noise 5 MCWN only Exceptions in subblock A 6 MCWN only Exceptions in subblock B 1 0 1 Failed see table 11 6 0 Passed see table 11 6 CALCulate2 LIMit1 FAIL For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Query only See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 Table 11 6 Meaning of return values depending on result display Result display SCPI Return values Graph Power vs Time CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the max hold trace failed 0 passed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit2 FAIL 1 the limit check of the lower limit line against the min hold trace failed 0 passed Mod Spectrum CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 th
194. atter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Introduction 11 1 5 A
195. b browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the I Q data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an ig tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary UO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser UO Data File Format iq
196. ber specified by the Statistic Count The default value is 200 in accordance with the GSM standard For each parameter the following results are displayed GSM UO Measurement Results Table 4 2 Calculated summary results Result Description SCPI query for result value type Current Value for currently measured frame only READ BURSt MACCuracy Parameter CURRent Average Linear average value of Current results from the specified READ BURSt MACCuracy Parameter number of frames AVERage Exception The average of the Origin Offset Suppression is the linear average of the power ratio converted to dBm subsequently Peak Maximum value of Current results from specified number of READ BURSt MACCuracy lt Parameter gt frames MAXimum Exception The peak of the Origin Offset Suppression is the minimum value as this represents the worst case which needs to be detected Std Dev Standard deviation of Current results for specified number READ BURSt MACCuracy Parameter of frames SDEViation Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MACC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results READ BURSt MACCuracy ALL on page 306 chapter 11 8 4 Modulation Accuracy Results on page 303 Modulation Spectrum Graph The modulation spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of a certain part of the burst 50 to 90 of the useful part excluding the training sequence TSC by m
197. ble Multicarrier wideband noise measurement IIMProducts Inner IM Table INAR Inner Narrowband Table IWID Inner Wideband Table OIMProducts Outer IM Table ONAR Outer Narrowband Table OWID Outer Wideband Table WSFDomain Spectrum Graph WSRPower Carrier Power Table LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result L TER 7 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Analyzing GSM Measurements Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query
198. ble 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Amplitude droop Default unit dB R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee ees Example READ BURS ADR SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Burst Power When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Burst Power see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Burst Power Default unit dB Example READ BURS BPOW SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out
199. ble for the optional Digital Baseband Interface and the optional Analog Baseband Interface Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BBP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 35V RST 1 4 V Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 119 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 119 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must e
200. c iacere e onore eni ea Ane ctr rero deck ue EC ERE 228 SENS amp PROBe sp ID SRNu rmiber itii titre rero tre e ER Ee Pede hA EEG 229 SENSe PROBesp SETup eMOFTS6L acci atro seek ditat FRE Ca Dee EXE xad ok Eos E ah 228 SENSe PROBesp SETUp MODB n at rere tener nr en c ERE snes ubexeceananetaeiveds 229 SENSe PROBespsx SETUp NAMEY scien tt eet icu Er ctl eerie el Riya re e eiectus 229 E Eed AR HE KE 230 SENSe PROBesps SETup T YPE cro euet ce c EI E rv teat ei ent en Aas 230 E Sa E EE 245 SENSE SWEep GOUN me H 251 SENSe SWEep COUNCECURR e nt iaceret rrr eene ne tht e HR I e Rt ae Ea Eher ER b Fa Reds 252 SENSe SWEep COUNETRGS CURR GhI erre eidar toma ntu dEEEAEEE 252 SENSE ads oM e a SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO E GER ere El EE Te CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MANimum Abt ak p eiiesaadie reire aai eiia ei 287 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK esses 287 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese 287 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe CALCulatesn2 DEETamarkerstmo X dieit deo cista AE aE E aa E 342 CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarkersin gt X RELatVe Pensi eco iaaa EN NOiD EEA EAEE EEIEIE 342 GALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersim gt WE 343 CALCulatesn s DELTamarkersms ESTATe cott o
201. c tette 263 READ W bechrum MODulation GATing eene nnns 263 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit LEFT State This command controls the left limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph mea surement and which offset frequencies in the table spectrum list measurement are checked against the limit This command affects the Modulation Spectrum and Tran sient Spectrum measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals use either the check on the left or right side to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel and to ignore the side where adjacent channels are located Parameters for setting and query State 110 ON OFF 1 ON check limit 0 OFF do not check limit RST 1 Example CONF SPEC LIM LEFT OFF Manual operation See Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 134 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit RIGHt State This command controls the right limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph measurement and which offset frequencies in the table spectrum list measurement are checked against the limit This command affects the Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals use either the check on the left or right side to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel and to ignore the side where adjacent channels are located Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query
202. carriers can be configured for a single MCWN measurement Carrier settings are available from the Signal Description dialog box which is dis played when you select the corresponding button in the configuration Overview Signal Description Device Carriers 3 Lo o 1 4 N fX fX f FATA TY AJ Ul f MA M Af yyy Y m Carrier Allocation Non Contiguous Gap start after carrier EI Carrier Active Frequency Modulation 1 935 0 MHz NB GMSK 2 935 6 MHz NB GMSK 4 936 8 MHz NB GMSK The carriers can also be configured automatically see Adjusting the Center Fre quency Automatically Auto Freq on page 137 Camer le Te 144 Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers oh 145 ACUVO CAOS eec a rede ti eu cre der Dax eo tee tu er de a Eee d edu ea n RR 145 ieu T 145 tele te EE 145 Carrier Allocation Defines whether a multicarrier measurement setup contains one subblock of regularly Spaced carriers only contiguous or two subblocks of carriers with a gap inbetween non contiguous Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements For details see chapter 5 15 2 Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation on page 73 Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation on page 218 Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only For non contiguous setups see Carrier Allocation the position of the gap must b
203. ccess bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 182 10 11 12 13 14 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals e Forsignals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated Select the Display Config button and activate one or more of the following result displays for modulation accuracy and error parameters up to a total of 16 win dows e Modulation Accuracy e EVM e Magnitude Error e Phase Error Tip Also activate the Magnitude Capture result display fo
204. ce by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 243 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 243 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 243 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 243 6 4 6 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGth on page 244 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Send
205. ce power levels can either be defined manually or determined automatically by a reference measurement prior to the noise measurement Reference power settings can be configured in the Reference Meas tab of the Mea surement Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then select the Reference Meas softkey e nthe Overview select the Reference Meas button Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Reference Meas Noise Meas Reference Power Measurements Measure Average Count Carrier Selection Carrier Reference Powers Power Level Ref Power RBW 300 KHz Ref Power RBW 100 KHz Ref Power RBW 30 KHz Enabling a reference power measurement Measure sse 163 Reference le EE 163 Cartier Selection CatTiBr m tr be ren eee RO RR Bern RR M ende E EAM TRER ES 164 Defining Reference Powers Manually 22 citroen trt tents 164 2 15 m S 164 L Ref Power RBW 300 kHz 164 L Ref Power RBW E 164 L Ref Power RBW 30 KHz rnc raria no ada dria sd a n Ro dd 165 Enabling a reference power measurement Measure If enabled the reference powers of all active carriers are measured for MCWN mea surements If disabled the reference powers must be defined manually see Defining Reference Powers Manually on page 164 For details see Reference measurement on page 72 Remote co
206. chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER Value This command sets the bits of the user definable TSC The number of bits must be 26 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER must be set first This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure lt ch gt lt 1 2 gt Subchannel number Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt string String containing the 26 user defined bits Example Subchannel 1 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell1 TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC Hz USER Manual operation See User TSC User Sync on page 99 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC Value This command selects the training sequence of the specified slot and subchannel used by the mobile or base station This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix s lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure lt ch gt lt 1 2 gt Subchannel number Query parameters lt ResultType gt TSC SET Queries the currently use
207. ci ee iT cue e be reet cea et eh rhe e RE ea end 285 CAL ee e el RER NEE 329 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt CUBE 332 CALCulatesn LIMitsk EXCeption COUNEMAX iei iot hene tkt kam e re eene eaae Exe na n oe bir be eek e naa 333 CALGC latesn gt Und e d id EE 329 CALCulatesn LIMitsks bOWer DATAJ rrr retta cta err et pde ee crue ceci ee 331 CALCulatesn LIMitek UPPer DATA itane otra iia re enr ero cer tenerent ey Son chua 331 GALGulatesn MARKersmc AOFEF EE 285 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEAk 2 ccccccceececneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseaaeeeceaaeeeseaeeesseneeeesieeeeesaeees 287 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimumg PEAK cesses iaia rennen eret nenne 287 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimump PEAK essent enne nnne nnren nre Eia 287 CALCulatesn MARKer mo TREIE deu edel EERSTEN 286 CALCulate lt n gt MARKGISin eX CR 343 CALC latesi TT MAN M 343 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe GALGCulatesn MSRA ALING SHIQW ct iret tren rre ren nter P Pere EH X EE Re PE PER Fai GAL Culatesp MSRACALINBEVALUe ccena rrr repre paye ense REEGELEN uE ENNEN 291 GALGCulatesn MSRA WINDowsn IMAL iue tnnt tn tnn entre tren rh rn ne En XR eaa 291 CALGCulate n MSRA WINDows n MIVal nne that et eraat teatri tierno iaiT 292 GALibration AIQ EA
208. commas Return values lt Placeholder gt lt Freq1 gt lt Freq2 gt lt Level gt lt Limit gt lt Abs Rel gt lt Status gt Example Usage curently irrelevant Absolute offset frequency in Hz Absolute offset frequency in Hz Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded READ WSP MOD 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Query only Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility FETCh WSPectrum MODulation REFerence READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the measured reference power of the Modulation Spectrum These commands are retained for compatibility with previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers only For newer remote control programs use the READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate or FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence commands instead The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the refere
209. considered the R amp S FSW GSM application divides the measurement range into 200 kHz bands If the limit line in one of these bands is exceeded a new higher limit line with an exceptional level is applied to the band Only if this excep tional limit line is also exceeded the limit check fails Maximum number of exceptions The number of bands for which exceptional limits may be applied is restricted by the standard 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 6 2 1 4 1 for single carrier 3GPP 51 021 chapter 6 12 3 for multicarrier BTS devices Thus the maximum number of bands that may use exceptional limits is indicated for each measurement as well as the number of User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 76 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise bands for which exceptions actually were used The limit check compares the number of employed exceptions with the number of maximum allowed exceptions Note that the maximum number of exceptional bands is based on the total number of bands included in the following Exception ranges However if the defined measurement span does not comprise all the bands in these ranges the maximum is not valid In this case the measurement may pass the limit check although too many exceptions occurred for the restricted span To ensure the correct span is used select FREQ Frequency Config TX band see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 149 Exception ranges Exceptions are defined for two frequ
210. ctrum Table on page 24 The returned values can be used to set the gating interval for list measurements i e a series of measurements in zero span mode at several offset frequencies This is done in the Spectrum mode using the SENSe LIST subsystem see SENSe LIST POWer SET Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or External and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 237 11 8 6 Retrieving Results Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured Example READ WSP MOD GAT Results 0 00032303078 0 00016890001 Usage Query only Power vs Slot Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Power vs Slot evalu ation For details on the individual results see Power vs Slot on page 27 d READ vs FETCh commands Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM applicati
211. d D in figure 4 4 Outer wide band results Active carriers Limit line for wideband noise Inner wide band results Middle f of gap 1800 KHz 11800 KHz I Fig 4 4 Inner and outer wideband noise results The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute frequencies of the wideband noise measurement segments For contiguous carrier allocation or if noise measurement is disabled this table is empty Furthermore the table may be empty in the following cases e The gap is too small 3 6 MHz twice the minimum offset of 1 8 MHz e ntermodulation measurement overrides wideband noise measurement Around every calculated intermodulation product frequency inside or outside the gap the R amp S FSW GSM application places an intermodulation measurement range of a certain bandwidth regardless whether intermodulation measurement is enabled or not Due to their more relaxed limits the IM measurement wins over the wideband noise measurement Thus many overlapping IM ranges can narrow down the wideband noise measurement segment until it is eliminated You can check this by activating only intermodulation IM order 3 and 5 OR only wideband measure ment and determining where a limit line is drawn and where there are none Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH IWID see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband INNer ALL on page
212. d Interface in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 1 QNAN not a number is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 BBMM 1 OUT 100000000 200000000 Passed Passed 1 1 4QNAN Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 105 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State
213. d TSC number or the set Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 114 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 USER TSC number and Set or User TSC Set 2 is only available for subchannel 2 RST 0 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example Subchannel 1 TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC 0 1 JI Subchannel 1 Query TSC number and Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0O SUBChannell TSC Il gt 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC TSC I gt 0 JI Subchannel 1 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel1 TSC SET Hz Manual operation See Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TADVance Offset Specifies the position of an access burst within a single slot This command is only available for access bursts see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TYPE on page 215 Suffix Number lt 0 7 gt Parameters for setting and query lt Offset gt offset from slot start in symbols Range 0 to 63 Increment 10 RST 0 Example CONF CHAN SLOT TADV 1 Manual operation See Timing Advance Access Burst only on
214. d by exactly one GSM frame length From there a narrow search for the next TSC is performed within only a small search area Thus the remaining frames in the capture buffer can be synchronized quickly after the initial wide search Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until all frames have been detected Sync Search 1 Sync Search 2 Sync Found YES Ame p oom qoem Tr Frame Length Error 0 ms Capture Fig 5 15 Synchronization using wide and narrow searches Synchronization errors The process described above assumes the GSM frame length in the signal is periodic within a given tolerance frame length error If this is not the case however for example if a frame is too short the application cannot synchronize to further frames after the initial search Frequency hopping can lead to the same problem as successive frames may not be detected on the measured frequency channel Timeslot Alignment Sync Search 1 Sync Search 2 Sync Found NO cai ms Capture Fig 5 16 Failed synchronization due to frame length error and resulting false search area A special Measure only on sync option ensures that only those sections of the cap tured signal are processed further for which synchronization was possible thus improv ing performance For frequency hopping signals it is recommended that you use a power trigger to ensure capture starts with an active frame External trigger
215. d otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not m
216. d the better the suppression of interference at higher frequencies Gaussian type filters are especially useful for signals with sharp edges as the step response does not exhibit overshoot 35 Magnitude Response of Power vs Time Filters i 1 MHz Gauss 0 500 kHz Gauss i i 600 kHz 400 kHz MC 300 kHz MC 100L eeee E Magnitude dB Ze e 120 140 160 Frequency MHz Fig 5 8 Magnitude Response of the Power vs Time Filters Step Response of Power vs Time Filters MHz Gauss 500 kHz Gauss 600 kHz Magnitude dB 15 Time us Fig 5 9 Step Response of the Power vs Time Filters Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application 5 7 2 Multicarrier Filter The Multicarrier filter is a special PVT filter that is applied to the captured data if the device is defined as a multicarrier type This filter is used to suppress neighboring channels which may disturb measurement of the channel of interest The output from the Multicarrier filter is used to perform synchronization and demodulation The fre quency response of the Multicarrier filter is shown in figure 5 10 Magnitude Response of the Multi Carrier Filter Passband Detail oj Ii I 1 Magnitude dB lI d 0 Frequency kHz Fig 5 10 Frequency Response of the Multicarrier Filter 5 7 3 Measurement Filter The Measurement filter is used
217. d to the RBW Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application Note In MSRA mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA Master For MSRA applications only the query command is available Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 111 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 219 INPut IMPedance on page 221 CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 206 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz vlt SCALelb Dhvislon rener enertrrrrrererene 234 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel sees 234 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectzvltSCALelbRlEVelOEtzGet nenene nener ererererene 234 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe
218. dard As a rule use the narrow list to test mobile devices use the wide list for base station tests e Select the reference power to be used to determine the relative limit values for the transient spectrum For measurements strictly according to standard use the RMS setting 10 Select the Display Config button and select one or more of the following displays for spectrum results up to a total of 16 windows e Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 Tips e Also display the Magnitude Capture for a general overview of the measured data e Use the graph displays for a general overview of the currently measured spec trum the tables provide detailed numeric values and an accurate conform ance check of the DUT to the GSM standard R amp S9FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application pa H Hei e The modulation spectrum shows the spectrum for a portion of a burst in a single slot see Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 the transient spec trum shows the spectrum for all slots in the slot scope including the rising and falling edges of the bursts Arrange the windows on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode 12 Start a new sweep with the d
219. detectors and ENAB1e parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 ina CONDition bit is not detected The ENAB1e part of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned Usage Query only Status Reporting System 11 10 4 2 Reading Out the EVENt Part STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVEN STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 11 10 4 3 Reading Out the CONDition Part STATus OPERation COND
220. e MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC USER sse eren enne 214 CONFioureM lcCH AkNnel SL OTcNumberz TE 215 CONFigure MS CHANneI SLOT Number FILTer Type This command specifies the pulse shape of the ideal modulator Suffix Number lt 0 7 gt the slot to configure Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query Type GMSK LINearised NARRow WIDE GMSK GMSK Pulse LiNearised Linearised GMSK Pulse NARRow Narrow Pulse WIDE Wide Pulse RST GMSK Example CONF CHAN SLOT FILT GMSK Manual operation See Filter on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt STATe State This command activates this slot this means that e g this slot is not considered as inactive in the PvT evaluation Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt Select the slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt State gt ON OFF Example CONF CHAN SLOT ON Manual operation See Slot State On Off on page 97 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYPe lt Modulation gt This command specif
221. e Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation see Mod ulation Spectrum Table on page 24 In this evaluation the spectrum of the signal at fixed frequency offsets is determined The list of frequencies to be measured is defined by the standard Additionally sparse versions of the specified frequency lists with fewer intermediate frequencies are provided for quicker preliminary tests Note Modulation RBW at 1800 kHz As opposed to previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers in which the modulation RBW at 1800 kHz was configurable the R amp S FSW configures the RBW and VBW internally according to the selected frequency list see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 135 For the Modulation Spectrum Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz For the Modulation Spectrum Table they are set accord ing to table 4 6 The frequency list also determines the used sample rate see Sample rate on page 122 1 8 MHz The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 1 8 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 6 5 MHz In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers this setting was referred to as narrow 1 8 MHz More compact version of 1 8 MHz The sample rate is 6 5 MHz sparse 6 MHz The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 19 5 MHz In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers this setting was referred to as wide 6 MHz More compact v
222. e defined as the number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier on page 218 Active carriers Defines which of the defined carriers are active for the current measurement Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c STATe on page 216 Frequency Defines the absolute frequency of each active carrier Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency on page 216 Modulation Defines the burst type modulation and pulse shape filter of each active carrier For possible combinations see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Note This setting determines the appropriate limits from the 3GPP standard Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe on page 217 6 4 4 Input and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e Radio Frequency Inpllt 2 1 nece eget cecos teen ceca ee Eno terea 2 Raona k RE urea date 146 Frequency mifit E 147 e AMPIMUDS Sellligs er o a p nasce ita ri ure RT a nes qune 150 e QUIDUE E ET 153 6 4 4 1 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency
223. e on page 137 11 5 8 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings GONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE 22 2c tama ra Lo icu eet E nna ainni Ea AE i 264 GONFiIgurer MS LAUTO E elle 265 CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE nennt eh nh nene nn renes 265 CONFig re MS POWer AUTO SWEep EE 265 SENSeJADJuSt EF REQUER reta o e a eti E ads n A R 266 CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE Value This command automatically performs a single measurement to detect the optimal frame configuration i e frame and slot parameters depending on the current mea surement settings and results This function is not available in MSRA mode if the Sequencer is active Note that in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode if the Sequencer is active this com mand cannot be aborted via the ABORt command Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example CONF AUTO FRAM ONCE Manual operation See Automatic Frame Configuration on page 138 CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE This command is used to perform a single measurement to detect the required level automatically This command is not available in MSRA mode Note that this command cannot be aborted via the ABORt command Example CONF AUTO LEV ONCE Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 138 CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE This
224. e 269 CONFloure SGbtCHrum MODulation RE erence ME AGure er ererererererersrsrsrenne 270 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel sese 270 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer esses 270 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNt Number This command defines the number of reference measurements to be performed in order to determine the average reference values This value is ignored if no reference measurement is performed see CONF igure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 270 Parameters Number integer value Range 1 32767 RST 10 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF AVER COUN 5 Manual operation See Reference Average Count on page 161 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier AUTO State This command specifies whether the carrier at which the reference powers for the MCWN measurement are measured is selected automatically if reference power mea surement is enabled see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 270 Parameters State ON OFF ON The carrier with the maximum power level is selected as a refer ence OFF The carrier to be used as a reference must be specified using CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer on page 269 RST ON Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS ON CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO OFF CONF
225. e 86 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 201 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Manual operation See Sequence
226. e Capture Displays the power vs time trace of the captured UO data Pre trigger samples are not displayed The analyzed slot scopes 1 to 8 slots of a single GSM frame are indicated by a green bar the Slot to Measure in each frame by a blue bar at the bottom of the diagram For details see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 For negative trigger offsets the trigger is displayed as a vertical red line labeled TRG User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 19 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 5 Magnitude Capture 0 0s 20 0 ms Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MCAP see s on page 275 Results gt on page 303 gt on page 302 on page 297 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error over time for the S 8 Magnitude Error el Avg 2 Max e3 Min e4 Clrw 3 5 sym 145 5 sym Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MERR see on page 275 Results on page 297 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 20 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays WEEN Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 173 4 Marker Table X value 13 25 GHz 600 0 kHz 600 0 kHz 2 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 343 CALCu
227. e carriers and the specified BTS class affect the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum measurement Aligning the limit line correctly The limit line defined by the standard must be aligned to the measured slots The align ment can either be determined individually for each slot or the entire line is aligned according to the Slot to Measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 190 10 4 Error Messages The standard requires that the entire line be aligned according to the Slot to Measure However in this case the Delta to Sync value will be identical for all slots in the scope see table 4 7 Note that the R amp S FSW GSM application assumes that all slots have equal length If they do not disable this setting in the Frame settings see Equal Timeslot Length on page 94 so the limit line is aligned to the slots correctly For non standard signals or if you require more precise delta values use the Time Alignment Per Slot setting Error Messages The following error messages may be displayed in the status bar of the R amp S FSW GSM application Check these descriptions for possible error causes and solutions Burst not found Sve DEE EIER ecce eerte erdt Burst not found Possible causes Possible solutions Training sequence TSC or sync is not defined cor rectly Check the TSC sync definition in Slot setti
228. e limit check of the upper limit line against the Graph average trace failed 0 passed Tra Spectrum CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the Graph max hold trace failed 0 passed MCWN Power Spectrum CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the wideband noise limit line against the average trace failed 0 passed possibly with allowed exceptions if enabled Retrieving Results Result display SCPI Return values CALCulate lt n gt LIMit2 FAIL 1 the limit check of the limit line for intermodulation at 100 kHz against the average trace failed 0 passed possibly with allowed exceptions if enabled CALCulate lt n gt LIMit3 FAIL 1 the limit check of the limit line for intermodulation at 300 kHz against the average trace failed 0 passed possibly with allowed exceptions if enabled CALCulate lt n gt LIMit4 FAIL 1 the limit check of the narrowband noise limit line against the average measured distortion failed 0 passed possibly with allowed exceptions if enabled CALCulate lt n gt LIMit5 FAIL 1 the allowed number of exceptions if enabled in subblock A was exceeded 0 passed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit6 FAIL 1 the allowed number of exceptions if enabled in subblock B was exceeded 0 passed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA This command queries the y values of th
229. e lower limit line This command is only available for PvT Full Burst results Suffix lt k gt 2 lower limit line PvT Full Burst only Return values lt LimitLinePoints gt Absolute level values in dBm Usage Query only SCPI confirmed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA This command queries the y values of the specified limit line Suffix lt k gt 1 2 3 4 The limit line to query 1 upper limit line for MCWN wideband noise limit 2 lower limit line PvT Full Burst only for MCWN intermodulation limit at 100 kHz 3 MCWN only intermodulation limit at 300 kHz 4 MCWN only narrowband noise limit 11 8 10 Retrieving Results Return values lt LimitLinePoints gt Absolute level values in dBm Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 MCWN Results The following commands are required to retrieve results from a multicarrier wideband noise measurement see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 Useful commands for retrieving MCWN results described elsewhere chapter 11 8 9 Limit Check Results on page 328 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving MCWN results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt CURRQ is
230. e number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement channel can be active at any time However in order to per form the configured measurements consecutively a Sequencer function is provided When the Sequencer is activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 8 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as the measurements are performed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab See also the note on using the Sequencer function in MSRA operating mode in chap ter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections R amp S FSW K10 Welcome to the GSM Application MultiView 22 GSM Ref Level 50 0 Offset 0 00 dB Device Band BTS Normal 35M 900 SGL Att Freq ARFCN 935 0 Mriz 0 Slot Scope Count 200 200 1 Magnitude Capture 1 Crew ALES 20 0 ms 2 PvT Full Burst 2 o 12 5 ps 3 Modulation Accuracy 4 Power vs Slot Current Average Std D
231. e range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Per Division on page 175 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces t is irrelevant The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Parameters Position 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Ref Position on page 175 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid for all traces t is irrelevant 11 7 3 Analyzing GSM Measurements For external generator calibration measurements requires the optional External Gen erator Control this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters Value RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Ref Value on page 175 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVAL
232. e required to set a specific marker to the result of a peak search CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimum AbPtak eene nnn 287 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimumf PDEAK 287 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK eese nnne 287 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M ANimum APDEak nnne 287 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK seien 287 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK cesis enne 287 Analyzing GSM Measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak sets the marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Max Peak on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a del
233. e rr nnne 239 TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDoff 4 lise E ene E ns Re ee Rene Ree Index Symbols Rel 378 WS ADO ceci e aa cope n are rdi o Des 50 TS 45 004 46 49 51 60 TS 45 005 46 58 69 135 El 46 65 MSO 1 0 VO ba cui ctos coner epe cic e ka bp tesi IER RES 46 TS ONOI M M 46 135 SPSK Ge c 49 378 Measuremeht filters tn cdi cree ee 58 Module ec 98 Symbol PCHOG E 61 62 T6 QAM ie 46 49 378 MeasuremehtTIlter s eer ro per edente cene 58 le e es 98 Symbol Delo E 61 62 32QAM One e 58 Sisi e esc AEAEE 98 Symbol peOG EE 61 62 A Aborting SWBOD cei n aec o eege 125 161 162 AC DC Coupling tne ttc 102 146 Access bursts Limit line time alignment siiis 133 Activating e Ree EE 197 Active probe MIGKODUMON Em 108 Adaptive DataiSIze smiir riirii etre cene nes 137 Alignment Big EE 133 Amplitude Configuration remote Configuration Softkey D Gu E Analog Baseband Input settings eret rrr rrt eterna 105 Analog Baseband B71 et EE 106 Input type remote control sseees 227 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Input settings nre rire eren nenne 105 Analysis Bandwidth cci c eee redo nre c ev iners 122 UE MSc cS 168 Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote
234. e selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt Result gt numeric value Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC EVM Usage Query only R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements eee eee ee ee eee eee eee ee ee ees FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 96 percentile of the Mag nitude Error measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt Result gt numeric value Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC MERR Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 percentile of the Phase Error measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results o
235. e settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box input Input Source Power Sensor Frequency IQR 100 101165 Digital IQ OUT 10 MHz 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Digital VQ Input State csetera De te rto pec iare n eae 104 ul EE 105 Full Sale Level EE 105 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level eese nine 105 Connected Instrument ciere testae baee tre bar en adea tta bak aan Rea ERR aae 105 Digital UO Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 221 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 225 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 225 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an UO sam ple with the magnitude 1
236. e start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 3 This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 For normal burst AQPSK the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 6 5 Pulse shaping 5 9 3 Definition of the Symbol Period The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 6 This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The transmitted pulse for the first tail symbol is illustrated in the lower part of fig ure 5 13 where it can be seen that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the transmit pulse occurs in the center of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5T EDGE Transmit Pulse a 15 E o N E 1 o E e S 05 lt i 2 1 D 1 2 3 4 5 Time Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Amplitude P 1 5 r o E H Decision Instant E 1 o E a 3 05 KS Symbol Period 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Time Symbol Periods Fig 5 13 EDGE transmit pulse top and the first transmitted symbol bottom The description above also applies to the 16QAM and 32QAM modulations defined for EDGE Evolution using the normal symbol rate QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM Modulation Higher Symbol Rate For the newer reduced symbol period higher symbol rate the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 defines two transmi
237. e tnr nennen 270 CONFigure SPECtr um MODu lation REFerence RPOW G arinina eene nennen nnn nnns enne GONFigure SPEGtrum MObDulation IMMedlate 5 rnit ore ie prb rero GONFigure SPECtrum NNARTFOW 2 trt tern neret E nt gk E PEE VERRE pe e ET YR EE OR Rn GONFigure SPECtrum NWI DA o onera tr corr rrt pe Yoda P AERE EXER EXER EFE EXER HER TY FEY ERE REESE CONFIgure SPEC rum SEC Cb P CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIIT iiio rtr htt tn nn rte a GONFigure SPECtrum SWITching FY BE rta rer th enr b entr inre rca tk nc cr RE RE RR CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching MMediate CONFigure TRGS ADPSIZ6 rentrer ener rege rr ren ree t tp een Eee dp ER dean a GONFigure T RGS NOFBITS error tcrra re rire er t t m EAE ERR FR EXER E FER RR XR E FE ee HR GONFigure t ROSEIMMediate ccrto emnes ears eorr reu EEUU MM RE YR HE EN E OY CINE ER est ORRE GONFigure WSPectrum MObDulation LIM T seen ta rn neue enne nn rnnt inn CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SEL6eGtL uneer por reet ier chin 262 CONFigure WSPectrum MObDu lation IMMediate erano eot ron ren eren pnr rn rotten e o tnt 356 CONFigure MS ARFCn ne CONFigure iIMS AUTO FRAMEG ONCGPE ctn tnr nna tbt eh tr Pte erre rc E CR CEP ERR RR 264 CONFigureEMSEAUTOBEMSILONGE nire pxerenpt E EE E nea ey E ep to treu esee pat reve as x o rema vt 265 CONEFigure MS AUTO TRIGGEr eler 265 CONFigure MS BSEarch
238. e4 Current trace Example TRACe2 DATA X Returns the Power vs Time values for the active trace in window 2 TRACe3 DATA X TRACel Returns the Trigger to Sync values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only Manual operation See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfSamples gt This command queries the UO data currently stored in the memory of the R amp S FSW By default the command returns all UO data in the memory You can however narrow down the amount of data that the command returns using the optional parameters By default the amount of available data depends on TRACe 10 SRATe on page 246 and SENSe SWEep TIME on page 245 Parameters lt OffsetSamples gt Selects an offset at which the output of data should start in rela tion to the first data If omitted all captured samples are output starting with the first sample Range 0 to lt of samples 1 with lt of samples being the maximum number of captured values RST 0 lt NoOfSamples gt Number of samples you want to query beginning at the offset you have defined If omitted all captured samples starting at offset are output Range 1 to lt of samples gt lt offset samples gt with lt of samples gt maximum number of captured values RST lt of samples gt 11 8 2 Return values lt lQData gt Example Example Usage Retrie
239. ea suring the average power in this part over several frames at certain fixed frequency off sets The Modulation Spectrum Graph displays the measured power levels as a trace against the frequencies The measured values can be checked against defined limits the limit lines are indica ted as red lines in the diagram The result of the limit check PASS FAIL are shown at the top of the diagram Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Modulation Spectrum Graph 1 Avg 2 Clrw Note The graphical results only provide an overview of the spectrum For a detailed conformance check of the DUT to the GSM standard use the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation which uses the 5 pole filter required by the 3GPP standard The numeric results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modu lation Spectrum Table on page 24 The following default settings are used for a Modulation Spectrum evaluation Table 4 3 Default settings for a Modulation Spectrum evaluation Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot selected as Slot to Measure Averaging Configuration Number of bursts as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check According to standard Limit check of average Avg trace See chapter 5 13 1 Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum on
240. easure gt Slot to measure in single slot measurements RST 0 Slots Example CONF CHAN MSL MEAS 5 Manual operation See Slot to Measure on page 127 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots lt NofSlotsToMeas gt This command specifies the number of slots to measure for the measurement interval of multi slot measurements i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum mea surements Between 1 and 8 consecutive slots can be measured Parameters for setting and query lt NofSlotsToMeas gt Number of slots to measure Range 1to8 RST 8 Slots Example CONF CHAN MSL NOFS 5 Manual operation See Number of Slots to measure on page 128 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet lt FirstSlotl oMeas gt This command specifies the start for the measurement interval for multi slot measure ments i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary 11 5 6 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query FirstSlotToMeas 0 based index for the first slot to measure relative to the GSM
241. easured This provides reasona ble time alignment if the slot lengths are not according to standard Note that in this case the Power vs Time limit check may show pass even if the timeslot lengths are not correct according to the standard Note The Limit Time Alignment also decides whether the Delta to sync values of the Power vs Time list result are measured for Limit Time Alignment Per Slot or if they are constant as defined by the 3PP standard for Limit Time Alignment Slot to measure The R amp S FSW GSM application offers a strictly standard conformant multiple slot PvT limit line check This is based on time alignment to a single specified slot the Slot to Measure and allows the user to check for correct BTS timeslot alignment in the DUT according to the GSM standard In addition a less stringent test which performs PvT limit line alignment on a per slot basis Per Slot is also available Note When measuring access bursts the parameter Limit Time Alignment should be set to Per Slot since the position of an access burst within a slot depends on the set timing advance of the DUT Remote command CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign on page 259 6 3 7 2 Spectrum The modulation and transient spectrum measurements allow for further configuration Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Power vs Time Spectrum Common Settings Modulation amp Transient Spectrum Enable Left Limit e on
242. easurements MCWN measurements include a combination of I Q based and sweep based mea surements Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode UO data can only be exported to other applications UO data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e lnpor Export Functions 28 See Kees mene a dee Dx Irene SR er 177 e How to Export and Import VQ Data oriretur tetris 178 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual 8 2 How to Export and Import I Q Data rer T 178 Ul NR 178 3 jojo MR HM 178 L o RC 178 Import Provides functions to import data UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual UO import is not available in MSRA mode Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 344 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export UO Export Export
243. eband Noise Measurements Parameter Description Reference power with RBW Reference power for measurement with 100 kHz RBW or manually defined 100 kHz reference value Reference power with RBW Reference power for measurement with 30 kHz RBW or manually defined 30 kHz reference value Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH WSRP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results FETCh WSPectrum REFerence POWer ALL on page 338 Inner IM Table Similar to the Outer IM Table but the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified in Intermodulation for the frequencies in the gap between the GSM carrier blocks for non contiguous carrier allocation are displayed The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Fig 4 1 Inner and outer intermodulation The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute IM frequency For contiguous carrier allocation or if Intermodulation is off this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH IIMP See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts INNer ALL on page 334 Outer IM Table Displays the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified in Intermo dulation for the frequencies outside of the sub blocks but not in the gap R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays WEE 3 Outer I
244. ed For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT Status Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Example READ SPEC SWIT 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Usage Query only Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching REFerence READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the measured reference power of the Transient Spectrum This command is only available for Transient Spectrum Table evaluations see Tran sient Spectrum Table on page 31 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz Example READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated measurements of the reference power of the Transient Spectrum measurement see Transient Spectrum Table on page 3
245. ed e DEF Defines the default value 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form Fo
246. ed statistically SENSe SWEep COUNt 200 ass sess 252 Configuring the result display Delete result display 3 and 4 and activate the following result displays 1 Magnitude Capture default upper left 2 PvT Full burst default below Mag Capt 3 Modulation Accuracy next to Mag Capt 4 Modulation Spectrum Table next to PvT 5 EVM vs Time measurement full width bottom LAYout REMove 3 LAYout REMove 4 LAYout ADD WINDow 1 RIGH MACC LAYout ADD WINDow 2 RIGH MST LAYout ADD WINDow 2 BEL ETIMe f25e8 eeeRes Signal Description Configure a base station DUT with normal power class 1 CONFigure MS DEV TYPE BTSNormal CONFigure MS NETWORK PGSM CONFigure MS NETWORK FREQ BAND 900 CONFigure MS POW CLAS 1 jesse Frame slot configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAM EQU OFF Set slot 1 On Higher Symbol Rate burst 16QAM Wide Pulse TSC 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE HB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe QAM16 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 FILTer WIDE CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC 0 Set slot 2 On Normal burst GMSK modulation TSC 3 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe ON CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TYPE NB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC 3 1 Programming Examples Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC TSC 3 Query Set numbe
247. ee Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 See Phase Error on page 26 See Power vs Slot on page 27 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 See Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 See Trigger to Sync Table on page 34 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 See Carrier Power Table on page 37 See Inner IM Table on page 38 See Outer IM Table on page 38 See Inner Narrow Band Table on page 40 See Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 See Inner Wideband Table on page 42 See Outer Wideband Table on page 43 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Table 11 3 WindowType parameter values for GSM application Parameter value Window type Default UO Modulation Accuracy measurement CONStell Constellation ETIMe EVM vs Time MCAPture Magnitude Capture MERRor Magnitude Error vs Time MTABle Marker Table MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy MSFDomain Modulation Spectrum Graph Frequency domain MSTable Modulation Spectrum Table PERRor Phase Error vs Time PSTable Power vs Slot PTFull PvT Full Burst TGSGraph Trigger vs Sync Graph TGSTable Trigger to Sync Table TSFDomain Transient Spectrum Graph Frequency domain Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameter value Window type TSTable Transient Spectrum Ta
248. ee 123 STATO C cioe eggeiesee eege edd SONKEV EE Capture time IBID om see also Measurement time 245 246 Carrier allocation sssssessssssssseeeeeeennes 73 Carrier power c HO 37 Carrier Power Table Result display scott rein ER rettet tesa 37 Carriers e nies c eet eb Se aries Active limit check e ele MEE SPP elle UE Frequency Gap ie Modulation Multiple Non contiguous zu Single ENEE oiii eta iere tiae Center frequeriey cicer t temer Analog Baseband B71 Automatic configuration EE Channel bandwidth MSRA MOOG iiie enia teat t puo d 83 Channel NUMDETS oirissrciso iirinn iiinis 47 110 GSM standard gen ire dioe 48 ET TEE 47 ic T 50 Closing Channels remote Edel 199 Windows remote A 278 281 Constellation Evaluation method 1 eei Sch 18 Continue single sweep Eet ertet rt ter OR Ve eges 125 162 Continuous Sequencer ci 86 Continuous sweep MCWN Softkey Conventions SGPlicommarids 2 22 2L eee a eene dea 193 Copying Measurement channel remote 198 Coupling Input remote eni ceto t eee 219 D Data acquisition 2 eterni ea 122 MSRA 123 245 Data format aue s 295 DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 227 D
249. ee chapter 6 3 7 Measurement Settings on page 131 7 Result Configuration See chapter 7 1 Result Configuration on page 168 8 Display Configuration See chapter 6 2 Display Configuration on page 87 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration To configure settings gt Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box The corresponding dialog box is opened with the focus on the selected setting For step by step instructions on configuring GSM measurements see chapter 9 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application on page 181 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 201 Select Measurement Selects a measurement to be performed See Selecting the measurement type on page 85 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all w
250. efault values EE 139 Delta markers But Un Ghd Secon M 172 RTR 133 Delta to Sync DESCHPUOMN Mr 68 c sence lacs 27 Demodulation elle UC Le 129 Settings Devito type ci eset ie ces 91 93 142 Default mw ees 139 Diagram footer information ssseeeee 15 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 226 Analog Baseband DI 107 Dig Input Sample Rate Digital Q E 105 Digital Baseband Interface Input settings cetero aa Input status remote Status registers nr SEENEN Digital UO Input connection information esses 105 Iniputsettings octets rr aniraa ter 104 Digital input Connection information eeeseeses 105 Digital standards le Une EE 48 Relevant for GSM eter tmr ges 46 Direct path Input configuration men 103 146 Remote resisti 220 Display Configuration EE DL Downlink De ll E Drop out time TWIG GOP uiuere eet ertet Ete tentent Duplicating Measurement channel remote 198 KEN WEE Configuration E zie 378 EDGE Evolution 2 3 2 cesta dott tena ca tara no 46 49 EGPRS EGPR3S2 aurori neoa gues extet iseeso eege ee 46 378 Electronic input attenuation sesssssss 113 152 Enable Left Limit Right Limit
251. efer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals Conventions Used in the Documentation All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Firmware 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and soft
252. efined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 13 Check the result of the limit check in the graph If it indicates FAIL refer to the numeric results in the table display for more precise information on which fre quency exceeds the limit indicated by a negative A to Limit value and red char acters 9 5 How to Measure Wideband Noise in Multicarrier Set ups 1 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application 2 Press the MEAS key and select the MC and Wide Noise measurement 3 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for the MCWN measure ment 4 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by select ing a multicarrier device type and defining the active carriers e Select a device type supports multiple carriers on the Device tab e Activate the required number of carriers and define the frequency expected burst type and modulation for each active carrier in the Carriers tab 5 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the required frequency band and measurement span 6 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device 7 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing dat
253. el is not lower than the input signal s peak power On the other hand avoid reference level settings that are much too high as they make very low carriers approx 50 dB under the reference level disappear in the noise floor and they will not be detected Optionally use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level function to finetune the attenuators and the pre amplifier AFTER the correct carrier frequencies have been determined For MCWN measurements make sure all detected carriers are in the measurement span for example using the Carriers 1 8 MHZ or Carriers 6 MHz settings see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 149 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode The GSM application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA appli cations receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the applica tion data For the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA operating mode the applica tion data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capture in Sig nal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see Capture Time on page 123 In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for GSM measurements The Magnitude Capture display shows the application data of the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA mode
254. elow indi cates which measurements can display which traces and which trace modes Note even if a trace is not displayed the results can still be queried see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 297 In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode For a description of the trace modes see the Trace Mode Overview section in the base unit manual Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters Mode AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures BLANk Hides the selected trace MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previ ous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previ ous one PDFavg The probability density function PDF of the average value WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM JI Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Modulatio
255. ements 1 Signal Description See chapter 6 4 3 Signal Description on page 141 2 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 6 4 4 Input and Frontend Settings on page 145 3 Triggering See chapter 6 4 5 Trigger Settings on page 156 4 Data Acquisition See chapter 6 4 6 Sweep Settings on page 161 5 Reference Measurement Settings See chapter 6 4 7 Reference Measurement Settings on page 162 6 Noise Measurement Settings See chapter 6 4 8 Noise Measurement Settings on page 165 7 Result Configuration See chapter 7 1 Result Configuration on page 168 8 Display Configuration See chapter 6 2 Display Configuration on page 87 To configure settings P Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box The corresponding dialog box is opened with the focus on the selected setting For step by step instructions on configuring GSM measurements see chapter 9 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application on page 181 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 201 Select Measurement Selects
256. en the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S slot lt First slot to measure Num ber of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value For equal timeslot length the expected offset For non equal time slots the measured offset See CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal on page 208 Default unit dBm Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 DELTatosync Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt LIMit FAIL READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL This command s
257. enceb D TIME EE 238 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDBoff TIME E 238 TRIGSer SEQuence IPPowerHOLDDol tuti cr a e ENEE 238 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis essere 239 TRIGgSer SEQuence EEVel BBPOWOE ciones eee Rhea e rete ee 239 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port cesses nennen 239 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel IFPower cesses nnne nennen n ernari ai 240 TRIGgSer SEQuence EEVelIOPGWDS codcx aeu et oce dre eb eret e ae eee 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVelRFBOWETF 1 ooori etii ninina nc ctv RA c2 iov aL E HR EYE AX a 240 TRIGger SEQuence REPowetlOEDoff EENS EENS tn n dE SE 241 WRIGGerESEQuenice SLOP E 241 TRIGO TR DIE 241 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 238 command for new remote control programs Parameters lt Period gt Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger leve
258. ency SPAN MODE on page 267 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Note In MSRA mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 233 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the y axis values To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then select the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Power Class Preamplifier ei Input Coupling AC Impedance Power CIES
259. ency or a center frequency and span RST TXB 11 6 3 11 6 4 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Example FREQ SPAN MODE MAN FREQ SPAN STAR 9150000 FREQ SPAN STOP 970000000 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 149 SENSe FREQuency STARt Frequency Parameters Frequency 0 to fmax min span RST 0 Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Start Stop on page 149 SENSe FREQuency STOP Frequency Parameters Frequency min span to fmax RST fmax Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Start Stop on page 149 Triggering Measurements The commands for triggering measurements are described in chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 237 Configuring the Reference Measurement Reference power levels can either be defined manually or determined automatically by a reference measurement prior to the noise measurement the following commands are required to configure the reference measurement CONFloure SGbCHrum MODulation RE Ference AVERage COUN 269 CONFloure SGbtChrum MODulsation RE Ference CARbiert ALUTTOL eneren ernennen 269 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer ee
260. ency ranges Carriers Af Ss 2 MHz Range A Af s 2 MHz Af lt 10 0 MHz 1 pic af lt 10 0 MHz gt Range B Fig 5 21 Exception ranges for multicarrier BTS limit checks Range A e For multicarrier BTS device types Bands with an offset of 0 Hz to 2 MHz from the Tx band edges are counted Bands containing third order IM products and adjacent bands are ignored For the exact details see 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 3 Forother device types Bands in a distance of 600 kHz to 6 MHz above and below the outermost carrier are counted For the exact details see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 6 2 1 4 1 The suffix required to query the number of exceptions in range A using remote com mands lt k gt is 5 Range B e For multicarrier BTS device types Bands inside the Tx band 10 MHz are counted Bands containing third order IM products and adjacent bands are ignored These are the only exceptions allowed by the standard Note that this range includes range A The number of exceptions thus includes the results from range A For the exact details see 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 3 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise Forother device types Bands in a distance over 6 MHz from the outermost carriers are counted For the exact details see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 6 2 1 4 1 The suffix required to query the number of exceptions in range B using remote com mands lt k gt i
261. ency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM Programming Examples E Slot 0 configuration Setup slot 0 for VAMOS AQPSK modulation Activate slot CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO STATe ON Normal burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TYPE NB AQPSK VAMOS modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe AQPSk Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR 4 dB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SCPir 4 Subchannel 1 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER Subchannel 1 Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Subchannel 1 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Subchannel 2 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC gt USER Subchannel 2 Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannel2 TSC USER 11010111111101011001110100 Subchannel 2 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER 11010111111101011001110100 Slot configuration Activate slot 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON Normal Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE NB AQPSK VAMOS modulation CONFi
262. ent can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command FEPCISBECUunceWITebingpALE 9 se ioci beo t Roe rer enu tet ERE ae sea aen ina 325 READB SPECtrum SWITching ALL eeepc reborn nnn aaaea 325 FEPICh SPECUUm SWITehihg REESFet ge a oaa ere tart erede tette ee teh 326 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate esee 326 READ SPECtrum SWITching RFerence GATimng cncncnii anida 326 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching ALL READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL This command starts the measurement and reads out the transient spectrum This command is only available for Transient Spectrum Table evaluations see Tran sient Spectrum Table on page 31 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values Placeholder curently irrelevant lt Freq1 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Level gt Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT Retrieving Results Abs Rel Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are return
263. ent is being performed by the Sequencer For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual The Sequencer functions are only available in the MultiView tab Sequencer Slate eser pE pee be tekst eee erani roe RE EAR E RET NER ari 86 Se ueneer MOU EE 86 Sequencer State Activates or deactivates the Sequencer If activated sequential operation according to the selected Sequencer mode is started immediately Remote command SYSTem SEQuencer on page 201 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 250 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt on page 250 Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed The currently selected mode softkey is highlighted blue During an active Sequencer process the selected mode softkey is highlighted orange Single Sequence Each measurement is performed once until all measurements in all active channels have been performed Continuous Sequence The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly in the same order until sequential operation is stopped This is the default Sequencer mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE on page 250 6 2 6 3 Display Configuration Display Configuration The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for the selected measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when yo
264. equired subchannel TSC assignment for AQPSK auto frame configuration AQPSK Subchannel 2 TSC j Set 1 TSC j Set 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Sub TSC 0 x x x x cha i nnel Set 1 x x x x 1 1 2 x x x x 3 x x x x 4 x x x 5 X x X 6 x x x 7 x x x 5 4 AQPSK Modulation The AQPSK modulation scheme as proposed for use in GSM systems is illustrated in figure 5 3 First the bits from two users subchannels 1 and 2 are interleaved The combined bit sequence is then mapped to an AQPSK constellation which depends on the SCPIR value The AQPSK symbols are then modulated using the linearized GMSK pulse see 3GPP TS 45 004 Trigger settings Sub chanel 1 bits a a Interleaver 8o bo a b Sub chanel 2 bits bo bi Fig 5 3 AQPSK modulation scheme for GSM systems Tx Filter Tx 3051 Linearized GMSK Waveform The proposed AQPSK mapping as assumed in the R amp S FSW GSM application is given in table 5 4 and illustrated in figure 5 4 where the first leftmost bit corresponds to subchannel 1 and the second rightmost bit corresponds to subchannel 2 Table 5 4 AQPSK symbol mappings reproduced from 3GPP TS 45 004 Modulating bits for AQPSK symbol in polar notation aj b Si 0 0 et 0 1 ej 1 0 e 1 1 elt The AQPSK modulation constellation diagram is shown in figure
265. er Source This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface or optional Analog Baseband Interface is used for input It is also not available for analysis band widths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 RF Power Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 Power Sensor Trigger Source Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source This option is on
266. er indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific STATus QUEStionable SYNC reg isters In this case you must check the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other chan nel name as a query parameter R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Table 11 7 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Bit No Meaning 0 BURSt not found This bit is set if no burst is found in the measurements premeasurements for phase frequency error or carrier power vs time SYNC not found This bit is set if the synchronization sequence or training sequence of the TSC is not found in the measurements premeasurements for phase frequency error or carrier power vs time No carrier This bit is set when no carriers are found by the auto frequency sequence 3to 14 15 These bits are not used This bit is always 0 11 10 2 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register The STATus QUEStionable LIMit register contains application specific informa tion about limit line checks Various bits are set based on the measurement result con figured fo STATus r a window If any errors occur in this register the status bit 9 in the QUEStionable register is set to 1
267. er port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup e When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place the firmware does not check the connection In remote operation the setting is activated without a prompt For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 227 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 232 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Ken Met 0 00 dBm Freq 13 25 GHz Channel 32 Code Power Relative Subtype 0 1 Inpu Att 10dB Slot Oof3 C
268. er which the MSRA Master performs a data acquisi tion and so on As opposed to some other R amp S FSW applications in MSRA mode stat istical evaluation of the traces averaging MinHold MaxHold is not reset after each evaluation in the R amp S FSW GSM application ing continuous data acquisition in MSRA operating mode over a longer period e g over night and then checking the average or MinHold MaxHold trace to detect any irregularities in the captured data You can take advantage of this feature in the R amp S FSW GSM application by perform For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 84 6 6 1 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function Configuration The default GSM UO measurement captures the UO data from the GSM signal and determines various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accuracy transient spectrum trigger to sync etc in just one measurement see chapter 4 1 GSM I Q Measurement Results on page 17 For multicarrier wideband noise MCWN measurements a different configuration is required see chapter 6 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements on page 138 The settings required to configure each of these measurements are described here Selecting the measurement type gt To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview se
269. eration See ARFCN on page 110 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency If you change the frequency the R amp S FSW updates the ARFCN accordingly Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 107 See Center Frequency on page 110 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax IS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz 11 5 3 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 110 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is couple
270. ers of the R amp S FSW However some registers are used differently Only those differences are described in the follow ing sections For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual RST does not influence the status registers Description of the Status Registers All the status registers are the same as those provided by the base system with the exception of the following registers which are provided by the R amp S FSW and are not available from the R amp S FSW GSM application command tree e STATus QUESTionable ACPLimit e STATus QUESTionable LMARgin lt 1 2 gt The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 11 10 4 Querying the Status Registers on page 351 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register AAA 346 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register once meret ea 347 e STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register 2 entente nnns 348 e Querying the Status Regieters enne 351 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during symbol detection If any errors occur in this register the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register is set to 1 Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Thus if the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable regist
271. ersion of 6 MHz The sample rate is 19 5 MHz sparse Remote command CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect on page 262 Transient Spectrum Reference Power This setting is only required by the Transient Spectrum evaluation see Transient Spectrum Graph In this evaluation the power vs spectrum for all slots in the slot scope is evaluated and checked against a spectrum mask To determine the relative limit values a reference power is required In order to detect irregularities it is useful to define the peak power as a reference However the standard requires the reference power to be calculated from the RMS power Note To perform the measurement according to the 3GPP standard set the reference power to RMS and the Slot to Measure to the slot with the highest power See 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 Transmitter characteristics For GMSK modulation the term output power refers to the measure of the power when averaged over the useful part of the burst see annex B R amp S FSW K10 Configuration For QPSK AQPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM and 32 QAM modulation the term output power refers to a measure that with sufficient accuracy is equivalent to the long term aver age of the power when taken over the useful part of the burst as specified in 3GPP TS 45 002 with any fixed TSC and with random encrypted bits See 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 5 2 Switching transients spectrum The reference power for relative measurement
272. ette enne enne nnns 316 READ SbtCirum MODulaton HE Ferencel MMediatel reren ertrererererene 316 READ SPECtrum MODulation GATing ioco iro iu sesenta eoruni eco caeca sen it eere uae 316 READ W bechrum MODulation GATing nennen enne nennen 316 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL This command starts the measurement and returns the modulation spectrum of the mobile or base station This command is only available for Modulation Spectrum Table evaluations see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas with one list for each measured frequency in the frequency list Return values Placeholder curently irrelevant lt Freq1 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Level gt Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM lt Abs Rel gt Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM lt Status gt Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Retrieving Results Example READ
273. ettings Frequency settings can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is dis played when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the Frequency tab in the Input Frontend Settings dialog box Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Frequency Band E GSM 900 H Uo Neo Value 0 0 Hz Center Frequency Gtepelze A 110 Fregueticy e crea cont Let c TONT 111 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported e T GSM 380 e T GSM 410 e GSM 450 e GSM 480 e GSM 710 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 204 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 205 Center Frequency Specifies the center frequency of the signal to be measured typically the center of the Tx band If the frequency is modified the ARFCN is updated accordingly for UO measure ments see ARFCN Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 232 ARFCN Defines the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number ARFCN The Center Fre quency on page 110 is adapted accordingly Possible values are in the ran
274. ev z Slot EVM t Current Frame Mag Error R C Ri Frames Phase Error 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available An orange back ground behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operat ing mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 and the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In the GSM application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings for the default UC measurement MultiView GSM Ref Level 50 00 dBm Offset D Device Band BTS Norn E o0 SOL Att 20dB Freq ARFCN 935 0 MHz Slot Scope ie Count 200 200 Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the GSM application for the default I Q mea surement Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset if available Freq ARFCN Center frequency for the GSM signal Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number if available SSS aa User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 13 R amp S FSW K10 Welcome to the GSM Application
275. f the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values Result numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC PERR Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak value of the Phase Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Phase Error results see table 4 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 313 Retrieving Results Return values Result numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERR PEAK SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent READ BURS
276. f the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 244 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 244 6 3 5 Data Acquisition You must define how much and how often data is captured from the input signal The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one of the following Select the Data Acquisition button from the Overview e Press the BW SPAN SWEEP or MEAS CONFIG key then the Data Acquisition softkey Data UE e DEE 122 WCC Dm 124 6 3 5 1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how long data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Data Acquisition Ld Data Acquisition Sweep Sample Rate 6 5 MHz Analysis Bandwidth 5 2 MHz Capture Time 100 0 ms Swap I Q sample Tae M PS 122 Analysis Bandwidth EE 122 Re pe 123 RE 123 Swap
277. ference powers are required to calculate relative results in the final measurement These power levels can either be determined by a reference measurement or they can be defined manually by the user In the latter case a power level is defined as well as three reference power levels for an RBW of 30 kHz 100 kHz and 300 kHz The reference powers depend on the modulation characterists Some typical values for various modulation types are provided in table 5 8 The table indicates the reference powers for the three RBWs relative to a defined power level Since all reference pow ers are measured with a smaller bandwidth than the power level all values are nega tive To define reference powers manually define a power level and then subtract the val ues indicated in Reference powers relative to power level for various modulation types for the used modulation to determine the reference power levels Table 5 8 Reference powers relative to power level for various modulation types Modulation RBW 300 kHz RBW 100 kHz RBW 30 kHz NB GMSK 0 3 dB 2 2 dB 7 8 dB NB 8PSK 1 7 dB 3 8 dB 7 7 dB NB 16QAM 2 8 dB 4 5 dB 8 6 dB NB 32QAM 2 9 dB 5 0 dB 9 3 dB NB AQPSK SCPIR 7 0 dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB 8 5 dB HSR N QPSK 1 9 dB 3 9 dB 8 2 dB HSR N 16QAM 3 0 dB 4 7 dB 8 7 dB HSR N 32QAM 3 5 dB 5 5 dB 10 0 dB HSR W QPSK 1 6 dB 5 0 dB 10 0 dB User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 75
278. figuration set tings 5 1 Relevant Digital Standards The measurements and the physical layer the layer of the GSM network on which modulation transmission of RF signals reception of RF signals and demodulation take place is defined in the standards Table 5 1 GSM standards 3GPP TS 45 004 Details on Modulation 3GPP TS 45 005 General measurement specifications and limit values 3GPP TS 45 010 Details on Synchronization and Timing 3GPP TS 51 010 Detailed measurement specifications and limit values for mobile stations MS 3GPP TS 51 021 Detailed measurement specifications and limit values for base transceiver stations BTS 5 2 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution The GSM Global System for Mobile Communication standard describes the GSM mobile radio network that is in widespread use today In a first step to enhance this network 8PSK modulation has been defined in addition to the existing GMSK Gaus sian Minimum Shift Keying modulation With 8PSK the mobile or base station oper ates in the EDGE mode While the 8PSK modulation transmits 3 bits within a symbol GMSK can only transmit 1 bit within a symbol In a second step to enhance this network higher symbol rate HSR QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation narrow and wide pulse shapes for the Tx filter have been defined Here EDGE Evolution and EGPRS2 are synonyms for this second enhance ment This means that GS
279. g the Noise Measurement The noise measurement can provide various results The following commands are required to configure the noise measurement Useful commands for configuring noise measurements described elsewhere SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 251 Remote commands exclusive to configuring noise measurements CONFIgure SPECtr mdMPOFJGr EE 271 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXCeption STATe 2 ccccceeeeeeeeeeceseneseneeeaeneaeaaaeatenetenenens 272 GCONFignure SPEC trun NNARTOW itae seas seduced eto onam aseo ee ate nene ee REPRE REPE Rag 272 GONFigure SPEGCIrumNWID uere rna aiiin apio ta LE End ne sa Eee ua apia nk RR APER 273 CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder lt Order gt This command defines for which order of intermodulation products the noise measure ment determines the level Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Parameters Order 0 3 3 5 0 No intermodulation products are measured 3 IM products order of 3 are measured 3 5 IM products order of 3 and 5 are measured RST 3 5 Example CONF SPEC IMP 3 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Intermodulation on page 166 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXCeption STATe lt State gt If enabled exceptions from the limit line check as defined in the 3GPP standard are applied to the limit checks of the MCWN measurements Parameters lt S
280. ge from 0 to 1023 however some values may not be allowed depending on the selected Frequency Band Remote command CONFigure MS ARFCn on page 232 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased using the arrow keys When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value X Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to a defined factor of the span The X Factor defines the percentage of the span Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 This setting is only available for MCWN measurements Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field 6 3 3 3 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 232 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum disp
281. ge in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 For Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN measurements only input from the RF input connector is allowed For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Parameters lt ConnType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Example INP CONN AIQI Selects the analog baseband input Usage SCPI confirmed INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 102 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used
282. gger JL Trigger 3 eG Output User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 156 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Note that manually configured gating is not available for GSM measurements Mea surements that require gating such as reference power and narrowband noise mea surement use internal gating mechanisms automatically For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual Tigger SettingS Mm 157 BI co ai na a N 157 Ml EE 157 L Extena Tigger Eege a ei rtt a tid 157 LIE POWER esnie a A E NE 158 dog NT TE 158 EE 159 L Drop Out TiNig ceeciei tectis post ecec tb dite tnter se eoctb beu rores babel suba pbed E 159 BE Ur PNEU EE 159 B ooo EE 159 Eri C ANNETTE 159 L MODO nasser nimi de rin borra o riore boris aee 160 date C 160 L Output ee eieiei raa 160 uo 160 L Pulse Uen n TEM 161 E WI NND 161 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Note Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 5 5 Trig ger settings
283. gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Troubleshooting Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Note if you switch between the IQ measurement and MCWN measurement the transi tion is set to its default value Thus you must reconfigure the transition after switching measurements if necessary Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 11 Troubleshooting If problems occur the instrument generates error messages which in most cases will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your R amp S FSW We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with information on the system configuration An xml file with information on the system configuration device footprint can be cre ated auto
284. gure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe AQPSk Subchannel 1 TSC O Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number and Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC TSC 0 Subchannel 1 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC SET Ze X Subchannel 2 TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC 0 2 Subchannel 2 Query TSC number and Set number Programming Examples CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC 0 2 Subchannel 2 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC TSC 0 Subchannel 2 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC SET i gt 2 a Slot 2 7 configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF ZE EE Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 0 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g EVM modulation spectrum CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL MEASure 0 Configure slots 0 1 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure
285. hannelType PILOT LJ T Input Source Probes Probe I Probe Q Name RT ZD10 Serial Number 201241 Part Number 1410 4715 02 Type Differential wd Eee at Common Mode Offset 0 0 v Common Settings For each possible probe connector Baseband Input I Baseband Input Q the detec ted type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each connected probe e Probe name Serial number e R amp S part number Type of probe Differential Single Ended For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Common ee Ee CN 108 lee Dr EE 108 Common Mode Offset Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup CMOFfset on page 228 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe 6 3 3 2 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 229 Frequency S
286. hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 213 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 237 INPut EATT AUTO on page 237 INPut EATT on page 236 6 3 3 4 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Input Settings Some input setti
287. he GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded 4 Transient Spectrum Graph 1 Max e2 Clrw Note The graphical results only provide an overview of the spectrum For a detailed conformance check of the DUT to the GSM standard use the Transient Spectrum Table evaluation which uses the 5 pole filter required by the 3GPP standard The numeric results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modu lation Spectrum Table on page 24 The following default settings are used for Transient Spectrum measurements User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 30 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays O EEN Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot scope defined by Number of Slots to measure and the First Slot to measure in the Demodulation Settings see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 126 Averaging Configuration Number of frames as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check Limit check of maximum Max trace See chapter 5 13 2 Limit Check for Transient Spectrum on page 70 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH TSFD see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 297 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 329 Transient Spectrum Table The transient spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of the slot scope by measuring the power in these slots ove
288. he R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers The following topics specific to the GSM application are described here LEM sostiene E 192 e COMMON SUMO xe ited acetate nadie ia dad ieee eaten du o duode pudo 197 e Activating GSM Measurements ceci ise Lid ea HELLE aod uaa 197 e Selecting the Measurement iecit than ndn ttn then 202 e Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements nesr rees 203 e Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements eee 266 e Analyzing GSM Measurement c ccecceccteceseeeeteeeeseeenseeeeeseneteeeeneenteeeeenntes 273 e Retrieving Resuhts nennen nnnm nennen enn Ennen nanne 295 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 344 e Status Repotr ng System ssi R dee 345 e THOUDISS INO OUING acids sissies et e aa Nee X ERRRENQRRTEPK ER SEE Eed 354 e Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility 355 Programming Examples cossirers enia eerie dec eee nec 364 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or event
289. he binary transmission of trace data For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator SENSe IQ FFT LENGth Queries the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the lon ger the calculation takes Return values lt NoOfBins gt integer value Range 3 to 524288 RST 1024 Example IQ FFT LENG 2048 Retrieving Results Usage Query only SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt TraceNumber gt This command reads trace data out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt This command is only available for graphical result displays The returned values are scaled in the current level unit The data format depends on FORMat DATA on page 295 For Constellation diagrams the result is a vector of UO values for the measured points in the diagram The result is returned as a list of 1 Q value pairs Query parameters l
290. he distinct limit lines are reduced to the remaining area s LL A LL B e M C D IM A B 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement If wideband noise measurement is activated the total frequency range of the measure ment defined by the selected span and the GSM band is divided in non overlapping frequency segments according to the following rules Basically the segments are those defined in the tables in section 6 5 1 and follow ing of the 3GPP TS 51 021 standard The frequency offsets defined there are applied relative to all outermost carriers i e below the lowest carrier and above the highest carrier For non contiguous mode the same principle is applied in the gap e The resulting segments can be limited further by the defined span see chap ter 6 4 4 2 Frequency Settings on page 147 Note If the span is too small no wideband noise results can be calculated For a measurement according to standard set the span to the TX band automatically see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 149 e The segments are also limited by the maximum range demanded by the GSM standard 10 MHz outside the edge of the relevant transmit band e Adjacent segments are not merged to one large segment even if their limit values happen to be identical Multicarrier and Wideband Noise e The R amp S FSW GSM application calculates where the standard demands intermo dulation measurements instead of wideband no
291. he left User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 279 Analyzing GSM Measurements Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WIND
292. hecks the list of theoretical IM fre quencies for the following aspects e ntermodulation frequencies are ignored if they are outside the set frequency span or the range defined by the standard typically the Tx band 2 MHz or 10 MHz e For some measurements the GSM standard distinguishes how many carriers were involved in generating the intermodulation This means checking how many c 0 Overlapping intermodulation limit lines Intermodulations with different orders for example 3 and 5 might fall on the exact same frequency or so close that the corresponding limit line ranges overlap In this case the R amp S FSW GSM application checks which IM s limit value or relaxation value applies according to the GSM standard The following cases may occur The overlapping limit lines have the same level LL A LLB r IM C IM A B In this case the point in the middle of both IM frequencies is determined and each limit line is restricted to the area up to or starting from this point LL A LL B M IM C IM A B The limit lines have different values and overlap over the entire span LL A LL B lb ECH IM IM A B The less stringent limit line is applied Multicarrier and Wideband Noise LL A rLe IM IM A B The limit lines have different values and overlap over a partial span LL A LL B Ebo dope IM C D IM A B The less stringent limit line is applied in the overlapping area t
293. here would be an increase in EVM because the measured signal has a smaller bandwidth compared to the refer ence signal Define which PvT filter to use depending on whether the channel to be measured has a reduced or equal power compared to its adjacent channels see Power vs Time Filter on page 132 For single carrier measurements make sure the correct Device Type setting is selected so the correct PvT filter is used for the power measurement Optimizing Limit Checks If the limit checks fail unexpectedly check the following issues Excluding results from adjacent channels In limit checks for multicarrier spectrum measurements the frequencies from adja cent carriers in the signal may distort the results of the limit check for a single carrier If you only want to check the frequencies from a single carrier in a multicarrier signal disable the limit check for frequencies to the left or right of the carrier frequency of interest see Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 134 This allows you to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel while ignoring the side where adjacent channels are located Make sure you select the correct Slot to Measure for Modulation Spectrum results see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 126 Calculating limit lines according to the used DUT For multicarrier measurements ensure that the DUT is configured correctly see chapter 6 3 2 2 Frame on page 92 The number of activ
294. his command returns the currently reached number of data acquisitions that contrib ute to the Trigger to Sync result It can be used to track the progress of the averaging process until it reaches the set Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 251 For GSM measurements other than Trigger to Sync use the SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent command to query the number of frames or measurements that contribute to the current result Usage Query only Demodulation Demodulation settings determine how frames and slots are detected in the input signal and which slots are to be evaluated 0 The commands for frame and slot configuration are described in chapter 11 5 1 2 Frame on page 208 and chapter 11 5 1 3 Slot on page 209 Ee SCOP m 253 e e tele TE EE 254 11 5 6 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Slot Scope The slot scope defines which slots are to be evaluated see also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEAGure eese nennen 253 CONFigure MS CHANBbeEMSELots NOFSIots 2 22 ccc otn 1o ione tacite ee ed o nhau 253 CONFioureM lcCH AkNnel M otsOFtGet eese nennen 253 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure SlotToMeasure This command specifies the slot to be measured in single slot measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary Parameters for setting and query lt SlotToM
295. his value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer on page 270 Noise Measurement Settings The noise measurement can provide various results Noise measurement settings can be configured in the Noise Meas tab of the Mea surement Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then select the Noise Meas softkey e Inthe Overview select the Noise Meas button Reference Meas Noise Meas Multicarrier Wideband Noise Spectrum Average Count Narrowband Noise lt 1 8 MHz E i i Wideband Noise gt 1 8 MHz en Intermodulation Apply Exceptions On Noise Average GOOFIE eiaieieeeeiuue cree etae satu tence akku penc s ean naL o ERR AENEA Ep nene Da Rata d ELE REA 165 INarrowband Noise 1 9 E e oerte ret nett erae et ttes 166 Wideband Noise 21 9 MHZ EE 166 Tore e UT EE 166 Adapting the limit lines for wideband noise Apply Exceptions 166 Noise Average Count Defines the number of noise measurements to be performed in order to determine the average result values Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 251 6 4 9 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Narrowband Noise 1 8 MHz If enabled narrowband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Note that narrowband noise measurement is only available for multicarrier device type
296. i Carrier Burst Type Modulation Filter Training Sequence TSC User TSC Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration gd Normal Burst NB TSC 0 Set 1 00000000000000000000 000000 Fig 6 2 Slot configuration for normal and higher symbol rate bursts R amp S FSW K10 l Configuration Band 8TS Norr Slot Multi Carrier Burst Type Modulation Filter Timing Advance Sync User Sync 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 Fig 6 3 Slot configuration for access burst The Slot settings are dependant on each other and only specific combinations of these parameters are available in this dialog box see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Slot State On Off Activates or deactivates the selected slot The R amp S FSW GSM application expects an input signal within the active slots only At least the Slot to Measure must be active in order to evaluate it Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt STATe on page 210 Burst Type Assigns a burst type to the selected slot The following burst types are supported e Normal NB Higher Symbol Rate HB e Access AB The graphical slot structure is adapted according to the selected burst type SSS gt e eae User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 97 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Note The Slot settings are dependant on each other and only specific combinations of these
297. ical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 237 INPut EATT AUTO on page 237 INPut EATT on page 236 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 6 3 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 101 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 235 INPut GAIN VALue on page 235 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear
298. icro e BTS Pico e MS Normal e MS Small e Multicarrier BTS Wide Area e Multicarrier BTS Medium Range e Multicarrier BTS Local Area The default device type is BTS Normal Remote command CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 203 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported e T GSM 380 e T GSM 410 e GSM 450 6 3 2 2 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 204 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 205 Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 206 Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measurements only Defines the maximum output power per carrier which determines the limit lines for the modulation spectrum UO measurements and MCWN measurement In Auto mode the maximum measured power level for the carriers is used This setting is only available for multicarrier measu
299. icular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 171 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 248 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switche
300. ier measurements is described in chapter 6 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements on page 138 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Swenson O 0 im Device Band EX x An idR Fron ARECN i Slot Senne Lr Count a itc a aM Device Type Input Frequency ARFCN ze Capture Time Ref Level Swap IQ Level Offset Ka Statistic Count Synchronization TSC Measure only on Syn STRU EIE I Magnitude Capture gt Fig 6 1 Configuration Overview for Modulation Accuracy measurement In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 6 3 2 Signal Description on page 90 2 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 6 3 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings on page 101 3 Triggering See chapter 6 3 4 Trigger Settings on page 116 4 Data Acquisition See chapter 6 3 5 Data Acquisition on page 121 5 Demodulation Settings See chapter 6 3 6 Demodulation on page 126 6 Measurement Settings S
301. ies the modulation type Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt the slot to configure Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Modulation gt GMSK GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying 1 bit symbol QPSK QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift keying 2 bits symbol PSK8 8PSK EDGE Phase Shift Keying 3 bits symbol QAM16 16QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 4 bits symbol QAM32 32QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 5 bits symbol RST GMSK Example CONF CHAN SLOTO MTYP GMSK Manual operation See Modulation on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SCPir lt Value gt This command specifies the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR of the speci fied slot Notes This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR in dB Range 15 to 15 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example JI Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR 4 dB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SCPir 4 Manual operation See SCPIR on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 368 or
302. igger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Which settings are avail able depends on the R amp S FSW Trigger settings can be configured via the Input amp Output gt Trigger menu item Trigger In Out Source Ext Trigger 1 M Level 14V Drop OutTime 0 0s Offset 005 Slope Falling Hysteresis 3 0 dB Holdoff 005 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration o Gate settings are currently not available External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger 2 Input Output User Defined 7 E Output Type Level gy j Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger gE Trigger 3 GR Output desc ee 117 ui 1 MERCI PES 117 L External Trigger 1 2 8 usss suse rita rri ab kie eri dr Pain ntn 118 110 MUN TT 118 uz p 118 KEE eener 119 BL NU E m T T 119 Mig e E 119 Bj ADN e dated 119 Beie Tur PERMET 119 utl EE 120 TOGS HOON GE 120 ele EE 120 Tigger 249 utpote tiet a quee Riesen eus eu etu adu qux teet AE ea gua ud 120 OOU TYDE co resed e eet 121 ut 121 C Pulse Eeng E 121 L Send TMOJE NONE 121 Trigger Source Selects the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is dis played in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated F
303. ignal Standard The standard tail and TSC bits as set in the Slot dialog box are used to construct the ideal signal Using the standard bits can be advantageous to verify whether the device under test sends the correct tail and TSC bits Incorrect bits would lead to peaks in the EVM vs Time trace see EVM on page 18 at the positions of the incorrect bits Remote command CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits on page 257 Measurement Settings Measurement settings define how power or spectrum measurements are performed The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Measurement button Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Meas Settings softkey Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration 6 3 7 1 Power vs Time The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see chapter 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter on page 56 A limit line is available to determine if the power exceeds the limits defined by the standard in each slot Power vs Time Spectrum Trigger to Sync Power vs Time Filter Power vs Time Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to measure PerSlot Power vs Time Filter The PvT filter controls the filter used to reduced the measurement bandwidth in Power vs Time measurements Note The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to suppress adjacent active chan
304. iis 38 Limit CHECKS ocu Ren ente tdeo ead 76 Limit lines 166 Measurement eee tte ne e er ER ER nue 34 Measurement process sessessseeeeeeee 72 MSRA et fies dere eaten sleet e etude Na 35 Narrowband noise 166 Narrowband noise measurement 72 73 Noise measurement remote ssssss 271 Noise measurement settings 24165 Non contiguous carriers Basics 73 Outer IM Table geed SE 38 Outer Spectrum Table 40 43 POMONA ugedoe 187 Reference levels manual sss 164 Reference measurement 72 163 Reference measurement remote 268 Reference measurement settings Reference power level 164 Reference DOWOIS ccrte pre etes enden 75 Signal description remote 266 Spectrum graph ee more nre 36 Triggering remote 268 Wideband noise 166 Wideband noise measurement sseeseeceerrerreerenen 73 MCWN Spectrum Graph Results remote edades 302 MEAS KEY iua epar eei bsc v te Pena 85 Measure only on SYNC ient rr enne 130 Measurement channel Creating remote rre etre cette nes 198 Deleting remote aa Duplicating remote zotsan enne 198 Querying remote eee e ies 199 Renaming remote 200 Replacing remote Measureme
305. ilable when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Maximum Default unit dBm Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent MAXimum Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt DELTatosync READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt DELTatosync This command starts the measurement of the Delta to Sync value for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available wh
306. ilable when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Average Default unit dBm Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single measurement mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent AVERage Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent CRESt READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent CRESt This command starts the measurement to read out the crest factor for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only av
307. ime Results on page 70 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PTF see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 297 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 297 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 329 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 331 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 329 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 29 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Transient Spectrum Graph The transient spectrum is very similar to the modulation spectrum evaluation it evalu ates the power vs frequency trace by measuring the power over several frames How ever as opposed to the modulation spectrum evaluation the entire slot scope defined by the Number of Slots to measure and the First Slot to measure is evaluated in each frame including the rising and falling burst edges not just the useful part in the Slot to Measure Furthermore the number of fixed frequency offsets is lower and the peak power is evaluated rather than the average power as this measurement is used to determine irregularities The Transient Spectrum Graph displays the measured power levels as a trace against the frequencies for the specified slots The measured values can be checked against defined limits the limit lines are indica ted as red lines in the diagram The result of the limit check PASS FAIL is shown at the top of the diagram Note T
308. indow specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window 6 3 2 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes frame detection and measurement The Signal Description settings are available from the configuration Overview Device Under Test Setillg5 deter REENEN ERE e RP ec 90 RUAN ce 92 LEE o dup E 95 6 Camer ullo RP 99 6 3 2 1 Device Under Test Settings The type of device to be tested provides additional information on the signal to be expected Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration The device settings are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Signal Description button then switch to the Device tab Device Carriers Device Under Test Device Type Multicarrier BTS Wide Area Frequency Band gt Power Class None Maximum Output Power per Carrier Mode Auto Manual Value 50 0 dBm M BK H n 91 Fregueny Band ERA 91 POWER GLASS e 92 Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measurements only 92 Device Type Defines the type of device under test DUT The following types are available e BTS Normal e BTS M
309. ine the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency 5 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Power vs Time measurement e Define the PvT filter to be used for selection criteria see chapter 5 7 1
310. ines the appropriate limits from the 3GPP standard Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe on page 217 6 3 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e Input Source Selulgs eee tps erede na hte ce apud cea Dub IE Rd 101 GR GENEE 109 e Amplitude Sells xcu cecinere cnl o de i b d dete Maes 111 LEEIC TOU cile 2M 114 6 3 3 1 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Input settings can be configured in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box Since the Digital UO input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after switching the input source e Radio Frequency Iplik p opc eyed repu Ce EY o ren d ER esa ENEE 102 e Digital UO Input Gettinge e 104 e Analog Baseband Input TE e EE 105 e Ge EL Te EE 108 Radio Frequency Input The default input s
311. ing Advance Access Burst only Specifies the position of an access burst within a single slot as an offset in symbols from the slot start Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TADVance on page 213 Training Sequence TSC Sync Note for Access bursts this setting is labelled Sync but the functionality is the same Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration The Training Sequence TSC or Sync values are known symbol sequences used to synchronize the measured signal with the expected input signal in a single slot The available values depend on the modulation as indicated in the table below For user defined TSCs select User and define the training sequence in the User TSC User Sync table For more information on TSCs see Training sequences TSCs on page 50 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC on page 213 AQPSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC on page 212 User TSC User Sync Note for Access bursts this setting is labelled User Sync but the functionality is the same Defines the bits of the user defined TSC or Sync The number of bits depend on the burst type and the modulation and is indicated in table 6 1 For AQPSK modulation the training sequence is defined for each subchannel see chapter 5 4 AQPSK Modulation on page 51 Note As the User TSC table in the dialog box only displays 25 bits at a time a scrollbar beneath the t
312. ingle sweep mode with sta tistic count 3 0 002261 0 000577 0 006876 0 000577 0 011492 0 000577 Usage Query only Manual operation See Magnitude Capture on page 19 11 8 4 d Retrieving Results FETCh MCAPture SLOTs SCOPe This command queries the positions of the slot scopes in the current capture buffer indicated by green bars in the result display Return values Result The result is a comma separated list of positions for each scope with the following syntax xPos 0 xLen 0 xPos 1 xLen 1 where xPos i isthe x value in seconds of the i th scope xLen i is the length of the i th scope in seconds The number of values is 2 the number of GSM frames in the current capture buffer If the number of frames defined by the statistic count all fit into the capture buffer at once the number of values is 2 statistic count If not the number of values is 2 the number of frames in the last capture Example FETCh MCAPture SLOTs SCOPe Result for 3 slots to measure e g after a single sweep mode with statistic count 3 0 002261 0 001154 0 006876 0 001154 0 011492 0 001154 Usage Query only Manual operation See Magnitude Capture on page 19 Modulation Accuracy Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Accu racy evaluation For details on the individual results see table 4 1 READ vs FETCh commands Note that for each result type two command
313. inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Tip Try this function if the TSC can not be found 6 3 5 2 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 245 Sweep The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Data Acquisition e I Data Acquisition Sweep Statistic Count Statistic Count AUIS TG COUME eee m 124 Continuous Sweep RUN Bee KEE 125 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE esiosan raii e re tede ce 125 Connie Single EE 125 SII PE 125 Statistic Count Defines the number of frames to be included in statistical evaluations For measure ments on the Slot to Measure the same slot is evaluated in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count for statistical evaluations The default value is 200 in accordance with the GSM standard For details on the impact of this value see chapter 5 14 Impact of the Statistic Count on page 70 Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 251 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN
314. is User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 34 4 2 1 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application the Multicarrier Wideband Noise Mea surement MCWN This measurement comprises e Q based measurements on the carriers to determine their power levels and refer ence powers e Frequency sweeps with RBWs of 100 kHz to measure wideband noise and 300 kHz to measure intermodulation products e Gated zero span measurements with an RBW of 30 kHz to measure narrowband noise MCWN measurements and MSRA mode MCWN measurements are only available in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer operating mode not in MSRA mode see chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 For more information on MCWN measurements see also chapter 5 15 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise on page 71 e Multicarrier Evaluation Methode 35 Multicarrier Evaluation Methods The GSM multicarrier wideband noise measurement can be evaluated using different methods All evaluation methods available for the measurement are displayed in the selection bar in SmartGrid mode For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual By default the MWCN measurement results are displayed in the following windows Spectrum Graph Carrier Power Table The following evaluation methods are available for GSM MCWN measurements erede 36 Garrter Power Table n ecc rin xri a sta rk exe Sana ux eee en ee
315. is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 243 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 243 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 243 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 243 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length o
316. is displayed when you press the FREQ or SPAN key and then select Frequency Con fig Frequency Band Input Source Band Frequen Center Span Start Stop 942 5 MHz 39 0 MHz Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Frequency Amplitude Output E GSM 900 SR Tx Band 923 0 MHz 962 0 MHz Fre quen MITES 0 0 Hz Carriers 1 8 MHz Carriers 6 MHz The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported T GSM 380 T GSM 410 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 204 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 205 Center Frequency Specifies the center frequency of the signal to be measured typically the center of the Tx band If the frequency is modified the ARFCN is updated accordingly for UO measure ments see ARFCN Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 232 Span Defines the frequency span The center frequency is kept constant The following range is allowed SpanNmin lt f span lt f max fmax and Span min are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency S
317. ise measurement It does not mat ter whether the intermodulation measurement is actually enabled or disabled in the Noise Measurement Settings All determined IM ranges override a wideband mea surement and replace it This can make the wideband noise measurement seg ment start later end earlier or even vanish completely or be separated in several segments e The middle of the gap is always a boundary in case a wideband noise measure ment segment exists there e The gaps between 2 wideband noise limit line segments in the R amp S FSW GSM application are 1 Hz wide These exact values can be output via remote com mands However in the result display some start and stop frequencies may appear to be equal due to rounding effects In the wideband noise tables the results are then displayed for each segment see Outer Wideband Table on page 43 Limit checks in wideband noise tables For the wideband noise table results which indicate the distance of the measured value to the limit limit exceptions do not cause the wideband noise segment to be split into two or more segments The wideband noise table segments are constant and do not vary from sweep to sweep depending on whether exceptions are set or not as opposed to the overall limits see chapter 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results on page 76 Level Exception Delta to limit d L exception L normal Start Worst1 Stop1 Worst3 a Start2 Worst2 Stop2 Start3 Stop3
318. ise result in that segment Relative to the nearest active outermost carrier Freq MHz Absolute frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment dB Relative power level to reference power of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment dBm Absolute power level of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment A to Limit Worst power difference to limit defined in standard in that segment Defined exceptions are considered Negative values indicate limit check failed The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute frequencies of the wideband noise measurement segments If noise measurement is disabled this table is empty Furthermore the table may be empty in the following cases User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 44 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays The span is too small Wideband noise measurement cannot start closer than 1 8 MHz from the outermost carriers and ends 10 MHz outside the edge of the rel evant transmit band This measurement range may be restricted further by the defined measurement span see chapter 6 4 4 2 Frequency Settings on page 147 For a measurement according to standard set the span to the TX band automatically see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 149 e Intermodulation measurement overrides wideband noise measurement Around every calculated intermodulation product frequency inside
319. it checks see chapter 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results on page 76 The details of evaluation are described for the individual evaluation methods in chap ter 4 2 1 Multicarrier Evaluation Methods on page 35 Continuous measurement mode If continuous sweep mode is selected the measurement process described above is repeated continuously i e after the average count number of noise measurements the results are evaluated and displayed a new reference sub measurement is performed the noise measurements are repeated and so on 5 15 2 Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation In a standard GSM measurement scenario multiple carriers are positioned with a fixed spacing in one block This setup is referred to as contiguous carrier allocation Multicarrier and Wideband Noise Carrier frequencies are allocated in a grid with a spacing of 200 kHz The minimum carrier spacing is 600 kHz Multi standard radio MSR signals Modern base stations may process multiple signals for different communication stand ards for example two GSM subblocks with an LTE subblock inbetween In this case if you consider only the GSM carriers the carriers are spaced regularly within the GSM subblocks but there is a gap between the two subblocks Such a carrier setup is refer red to as non contiguous carrier allocation According to the 3GPP standard TS 51 021 a subblock is defined as one contiguous allocated block of spectrum for
320. ition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 11 10 4 4 Controlling the ENABle Part STATus OPERation ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register 11 10 4 5 11 10 4 6 Status Reporting System The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Note if you switch between the IQ measurement and MCWN measurement the transi tion is set to its default value Thus y
321. ivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the I Q Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 125 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 123 11 7 4 Zooming into the Display 11 7 4 1 Using the Single Zoom BISPlay WINBewsns ZODNEP AREA rosea ds sete dens daceetedes a aE tee otra tenet ten tees 293 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM STATe csse E unire nnns es naar nn nnne 293 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm EU CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MH
322. kHz PASS FAIL Limit check for intermodulation at 100 kHz Number of detected exceptions provided only if exceptions are enabled eks 2 IM 300 kHz PASS FAIL Limit check for intermodulation at 300 kHz lt k gt 3 Narrowband Noise PASS FAIL Limit check for narrowband noise lt k gt 4 Exceptions lt current gt PASS FAIL Number of bands with exceptions in range A currently maximum detected vs maximum allowed provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 5 Exceptions lt current gt PASS FAIL Number of bands with exceptions in range B currently maximum detected vs maximum allowed provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 6 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 36 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Note As of firmware version 2 20 markers are available in the Spectrum Graph result display Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH WSFDomain see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results TRACe DATA TRACel see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 297 Limit results FETCh SPECtrum MODulation LIMit FAIL on page 333 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 329 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol DATA on page 329 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 331 CALCulate n LIMit k EXCeption COUNt CURR on page 332 CALCulate n LIMit k EXCeption COUNt MAX on page 333 Carrier Power Table Displays the measu
323. kely does not coincede with the frame start for the GSM sig nal Avoiding unnecessary high sample rates According to the GSM standard modulation spectrum results must be performed at frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier in some cases When the frequency list to be used is set to 6 MHz in the Measurement settings see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 135 the R amp S FSW GSM application uses a sample rate of 19 5 MHz as opposed to the usual 6 5 MHz sample rate The higher sample rate extends the required measurement time Only use the 6 MHz frequency list setting if you actually require Modulation Spectrum results according to standard Improving EVM Accuracy If the EVM results show unexpected power levels check the following issues R amp S9FSW K10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 10 3 Extending the data basis Sporadic distortions in the EVM can be eliminated by evaluating several measure ments and determining the average over all traces Increase the Statistic Count in the Sweep settings to obtain sufficiently stable results Excluding results from adjacent channels For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers configure the DUT as such in the signal description In this case an additional multicarrier PvT filter sup presses power from adjacent channels This filter is also taken into account during the generation of the ideal reference signal otherwise t
324. keys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks 1 3 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the Conventions Used in the Documentation instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board 1 3 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped produc
325. l before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O0sto10 0s RST Os Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 119 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters lt Offset gt RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 119 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 120 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 120 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is availa
326. lOOFtset MAxlmum eene nennen nnne 310 READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation cesses 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage isset 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent essen 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MANlmum ener 311 FETChBURGOCMACCuracvlMERbRor PDEAK GDtEViaton reren errrerrrereee 311 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAK AVEHRage rernm 311 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAkK CUbbent isisisi iurien 311 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAK MANimum nennen 311 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAkK GDEViaton rnrn rnnrnrrrerrene 311 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlMERRor RMG AVEhHRage nennen 311 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlMERRorRMSCURent 311 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum esses 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation cesse 311 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage sss 311 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent essere 311 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum cessisse 311 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation essere 311 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlOSllbporess AVERage 312 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlO llbporess CLRbent nennt ennrrntrerersrererersrsrnnnnnen 312 FETCH BURG MAC CuracvlOSllbporess MAximum nene 312 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlO llbpress GDEViaton 312 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpnress AVERage eene 312 READ BURSt MACCurac
327. lance CURRent sss seen eene 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum sess enne rennen 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation essen nennen 310 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage seen 310 FETCh BURSt MACOCuracy IQOFfset CURRent essent nnne nnne 310 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum esses eene 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAK AVERage nennen nennen etes 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent eese enne nennen 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum essent rennen 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation esses enne 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMG AVERage nennen rennen rennen enne 311 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRorRMS Cent 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum 2 911 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation essent 311 FETOH BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpress AVEhage ener ennens 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress CURRent esses nre aaraa 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimumY na nnna nosene ArNe E EENE nan 312 FETCh BURStEMACCuracy OSUPpress SDEVIation isisisi aiiai i 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile EVMY iecit ar adian aaraa thin ra eir rr inna 312
328. late lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 343 Modulation Accuracy Displays the numeric values of the fundamental modulation characteristics of the signal to be analyzed in the vector UO domain error vector magnitude EVM magnitude and phase error IQ imbalance etc 3 Modulation Accuracy Current Average EVM Mag Error RMS Q Phase Error RMS The following modulation parameters are determined T User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 21 GSM UO Measurement Results Table 4 1 Modulation accuracy parameters Parame Description SCPI query for result value ter EVM Error vector magnitude for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK 9 RMS and peak error values for the current frame in percent RESUME 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all EVM sanc oe SEVM S RMS results for all frames in entire measurement fall SCH ype READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM Mag Error Magnitude error for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK d lt gt RMS and peak error values for the current frame in percent Beanie vee 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all Mag du MM eee eee lt Resulttype gt nitude Error results for all frames in entire measurement fall READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor Phase Phase error for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK lt gt Error RMS and peak
329. lay is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Note In MSRA mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 233 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the y axis values Amplitude settings can be configured in the Amplitude dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then select the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey put Frontene Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Power Class Preamplifier Off input couping Li Impedance 500 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration zie Kc 112 Reference E EE 112 L Shifting the Display Offset 112 Mechanical E E e EEN 113 L Attenuation Mode Value eene ener 113 Using Electronic ATUS OR the rii use edes a led x FREE um dR 113 IAD TEST pp ME E 114 L Greamplfler nnne reete 114 Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 B
330. lear Write 2 Modulation Spectrum Graph Average Clear Write Transient Spectrum Graph Max Hold Clear Write Trigger to Sync Graph Histogram PDF of Average Result Configuration The trace settings are configured in the Trace dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following nthe Overview select the Result Config button then switch to the Traces tab Traces Marker Scaling Quick Config can 1 Magnitude Capture Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Traece 9 eec ettet DR ca te a eaa i EE 169 Tace ModE EE 169 Preset All EN 170 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Gohtkeys A 170 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t STATe on page 282 Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe t commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces The available trace modes depend on the selected result display Not all evaluations support all trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the swee
331. lect the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Remote command CONFigure MEASurement on page 202 e Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function sssse 85 e Ee d UTC d DE 87 e Modulation Accuracy Measurement Confguratton eese 87 e Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements seen 138 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application These settings include the input source the type of data to be processed I Q or RF data frequency and level settings measurement functions etc If you want to perform the same measurement but with dif ferent center frequencies for instance or process the same input data with different measurement functions there are two ways to do so Change the settings in the measurement channel for each measurement scenario In this case the results of each measurement are updated each time you change the settings and you cannot compare them or analyze them together without stor ing them on an external medium e Activate a new measurement channel for the same application In the latter case the two measurement scenarios with their different settings are displayed simultaneously in separ
332. level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH TST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL on page 325 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate on page 326 Trigger to Sync Graph The Trigger to Sync measurement determines the time between an external trigger event and the start of the first symbol of the TSC The start of the first symbol of the TSC corresponds to the time 0 of the symbol period see chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 60 Only one result per data capture is provided Therefore it is useful to perform several data captures and average the results to obtain an accurate value see Statistic Count on page 124 Both graphical and numeric table results are available While the graphical results are mainly used to determine the required measurement settings the numeric results pro vide the actual trigger to sync value including statistical evaluation see Trigger to Sync Table on page 34 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Trigger to Sync Graph 225 297 us 0 5ms y div 225 301 us The Trigger to Sync diagram shows two traces e Trace1 a histogram shows the probability density function PDF of all measured Trigger to Sync values Obviously the hist
333. lfEVMIPEAkK MA Ximum eene eene nennen nennen 308 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation ET READ BURG MACCurScvlEVMIRMG AVEHage A READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent tnnt ntn eth entren tenen 309 READ BURG MACCurScvlEVMIRMG MA Nimum nennen een rennen nnne 309 READ BURG MAC CurScvlEVMIRMG GD Viaton nennen 309 READ SPECtrum MObDulation GATTIN sessirnir treten eren torre eR dne en 316 READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerencef MMedijate iiinis 316 READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence GATing cscaco tne three t ek tene te x Een 326 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate 6 nante nh tn tnnt 326 READ SPEGCtrum SWITChing ADE 2 cus oscura saute a CO He SER SHE EE REDE ar EEOXE EEEO EE M AME aS Eu 325 READ SPECtrum WMODulation GAT irig r rn tr a Per dep PER en 364 READ WSPectrum MObDu lation GATIng tione rrr e rrr hb th ERR E ERE LR ER ET FE EE RES 263 READ WSPectr m MODulation GATING e once patrare entrar aee NEEN ESEESE EARN FOE SET icine 316 READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate hu READ WSPectrum MObDulation ALL 5 x erc eerta toco t er tn err re ere nene EE EPI EE 362 SENSE Le Er Ke RE 267 GE MT el idee Re el T TEE 352 STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition GEET Elei E RE 352 MaApltzddscl
334. limits depend on the following parameters Frequency band not for MS Burst Type Modulation Filter not for MS The measured reference slot power Limit Check for Power vs Time Results The determined Power vs Time values can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Power vs Time diagram see PvT Full Burst on page 28 and in the Power vs Slot table see Power vs Slot on page 27 The limits depend on the following parameters e The maximum Max trace is checked agains the upper limit e The minimum Min trace is checked against the lower limit The limit masks are generated adaptively from the measured signal according to the following parameters Frequency band special masks for PCS1900 and DCS1800 BTS with GMSK Burst type Modulation Filter The reference burst power is measured and the 0 dB line of the limit mask is assigned to it For MS the 6 dB line of the limit mask depends on the PCL The PCL is derived from the measured burst power Impact of the Statistic Count Generally the Statistic Count defines how many measurements or analysis steps are performed equivalent to the Sweep Count in applications that perform sweeps In particular the Statistic Count defines the number of frames to be included in statis tical evaluations For measurements on the Slot to Measure
335. lot based It can measure up to 8 consecutive GSM slots 1 frame and store the power results for all slots Power vs Time and Power vs Slot measurements see PvT Full Burst on page 28 and Power vs Slot on page 27 Defining the Scope of the Measurement used synonymously for slot In this documentation we use the term burst when the signal behaves like a pulse i e power is ramped up and down The up ramp is referred to as the rising edge the down ramp as the falling edge A burst may occur within one or more slots which is a measure of time in the captured signal Thus a burst may coincide with a slot but it must not necessarily do so o In previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers the term burst was Usually only slots in which a burst is expected are of interest Such slots are defined as active slots in the signal description Within this slot scope defined by First Slot to measure and Number of Slots to mea sure a single slot Slot to Measure is selected for a more detailed analysis e g Modulation Accuracy measurement see Modulation Accuracy on page 21 The Slot to Measure is required for the following reasons To provide the reference power and time reference for the Power vs Time mea surement see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Typically the masks for all slots are time aligned according to the timing of the Slot to Measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 e Al M
336. lowed capture time is reduced from 10 ms to 866 us see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 Measure only slots at the beginning of the frame directly after the trigger see chapter 11 5 6 1 Slot Scope on page 253 e Use a small statistic count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 251 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE TIME AUTO OFF SWE TIME 1s Manual operation See Capture Time on page 123 TRACe IQ SRATe This command queries the final user sample rate for the acquired UO data Parameters lt SampleRate gt The sample rate is a fixed value depending on the frequency range to be measured see also Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 135 Range 100 Hz to 10 GHz continuously adjustable RST 32 MHz Example See chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Usage Query only Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Manual operation See Sample rate on page 122 TRACe IQ BWIDth This command queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter The bandwidth of the resampling filter depends on the sample rate Usage Query only Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 122 11 5 5 2 Configuring and Performing Sweeps The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Useful commands for configuring sweeps described elsewhere SENSe SWEep TIM
337. lr stole 326 User E TEE 8 V VAMOS xu irte ett erc ean 50 378 Ww tte e 46 62 Fille ones teet e e DE ee eed Oy 98 Wideband measurement Results oeiee efira pc aes tele 44 Wideband noise MGWIN itii e e ed e utc Measurement RANGES siisii sedenie al Window title bar information eeees 14 Windows Adding remote rsisi niea 275 Closing remote 278 281 COMMQUIIAG et 90 Layout remote 278 Maximizing remote cene 274 Querying remote dek eee eines 277 Replacing remote ninasi i dnnt 278 Splitting remote Types remote cr ete tr ttes X X value Enc a 171 Y Y axis ell Le ET Y Scaling pice ETATE YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eese 103 Activating Deactivating remote 221 Z Zooming Activating remote t teet 293 Area Multiple mode remote n 294 Area remote iiec cade rent b ei teen 293 Deactivatirig EE 176 Multi Pl MODE sirimiri rrenari eene 176 Multiple mode remote AAA 294 ci c e 293 Restoring original display sissioni 176 Single mode rre reet nr rrr rien 176 Single mode remote AA 293
338. lternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e ENEE 195 le BEE 196 e Charactef Dobson eec utei ir dedo Pee Vrbe UD e ie ca dad ede ced 196 e Character EE 197 e tee D oos eee ere eee enr Pepe oer UPON OPEN 197 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is support
339. ly available if a power sensor is connected and configured Note For R amp S power sensors the Gate Mode Lv is not supported The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed Remote command TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 Time Trigger Source Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 239 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 240 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 238 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Note When using an external trigger the trigger offset is particularly important in order to detect the frame start correctly See chapter 5 5 Trigger setting
340. mand OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 244 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 244 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration 6 4 5 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following Press the TRIG key and then select the Trigger Config softkey e Inthe Overview select the Trigger button Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Free Run Drop Out Time Hysteresis Holdoff The GSM measurements can be performed in Free Run untriggered mode how ever an external trigger or a power trigger can speed up measurements For more information see on page 52 d External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Output Type User Defined Level Tow Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Tri
341. matically DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo lt FileName gt This command creates a zip file with important support information The zip file con tains the system configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display if available This data is stored to the C R_S Instr user directory on the instrument As a result of this command the created file name including the drive and path is returned You can use the resulting file name information as a parameter for the MMEM COPY command to store the file on the controller PC If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send this file to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster 11 12 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Return values lt FileName gt C R_S Instr user lt R amp S Device ID gt _ lt CurrentDate gt _ lt Current Time gt String containing the drive path and file name of the created support file where the file name consists of the following ele ments lt R amp S Device ID The unique R amp S device ID indicated in the Versions Options information lt CurrentDate gt The date on which the file is created lt YYYYMMDD gt lt CurrentTime gt The time at which the file is created lt HHMMSS gt Example DIAG SERV SINF Result c R amp S instr user FSW 26 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip MMEM COPY c R am
342. me evaluation determines the power of all slots bursts in the selected slot scope and performs a limit check of the power vs time trace against the specified PvT mask The PvT Full Burst result display shows the power vs time trace where the time axis corresponds to the selected slot scope The PvT mask is indicated by red lines and the overall result of the limit check is shown at the top of the diagram Note The result of the Power vs Time limit check for individual slots is indicated in the Power vs Slot on page 27 evaluation R amp S9FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Avg e2 Max 3 Min e4 Clrw 127 385 us 1 254 ms Note Full burst refers to the fact that the entire burst is displayed including the rising and falling edges and the burst top However you can easily analyze the edges in more detail using the zoom functions see chapter 7 2 Zoom Functions on page 175 The following default settings are used for a Power vs Time evaluation Table 4 8 Default settings for a Power vs Time evaluation Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot scope defined by First Slot to measure and Number of Slots to mea sure Averaging Configuration Number of bursts as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check According to standard e The maximum Max trace is checked agains the upper limit e The minimum Min trace is checked against the lower limit See chapter 5 13 3 Limit Check for Power vs T
343. ment Default unit Hz lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt PowerAtWorst gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB lt LimitAtWorst gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Indicates whether absolute or relative power values are returned depending on CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT on page 261 11 8 11 Retrieving Results LimCheck Result of the limit check in this limit line segment PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP WID OUT Usage Query only Manual operation See Outer Wideband Table on page 43 Retrieving Marker Results Useful commands for retrieving marker results described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 343 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results GALGulate n DELTatmarketrsrmi X naccarii aaa sadawsans aE ra RAD RW A RRR D ed 342 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative 342 CAL Culatesms DELETamalkersmi Y EE 343 GAEGulate mMARKersmis EE 343 GALOulate n MARKersm Y9 EE 343 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a part
344. ment channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 200 Activating GSM Measurements lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN TQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 198 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt GSM GSM application R amp S FSW K10 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 90 SYSTem SEQuencer lt State gt This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programmi
345. method Marker to MaC ace e e coercere etes Markers Absolute peak Assigned trace Configuration remote seseeeesee 286 Configuring i 170 Configuring softkey w 170 Deactivating Banke D lta markets 2007 treten erento tne tech 172 Minimum 174 Peak TS Positioning ss IPS Positioning remote 286 Querying position remote 943 Settings remote WEE 284 Slate enge ei 171 UE 173 Table evaluation method 21 45 D E 172 Max Peak terae oae ead 174 Maximizing Windows remote eene eei 274 MCWN Average count 161 163 165 Carrier Power results rrt tn 37 Carrier Power Table emet 37 Carrier selection reference 164 Configuration overview 140 Configuring i5 198 Configuring remote 266 Continuous measurements ssseeeees 73 Evaluating results enn rtt 73 Evaluation methods eterne 35 Frequency remote 267 Frontend remote 266 Inner IM Table 298 Inner Narrow Band Table 40 Inner Spectrum Table eem 42 Input output remote 266 Intermodulation 166 Intermodulation measurement sssssss 73 Intermodulation results 2 00 eee eee o
346. mmand CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 270 Reference Average Count Defines the number of reference measurements to be performed in order to determine the average reference values Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNt on page 269 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Carrier Selection Carrier Specifies the carrier at which the reference powers for the MCWN measurement are measured if reference power measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 163 In Auto mode the carrier with the maximum power level is selected as a reference In Manual mode you must specify the carrier to be used as a reference in the Car rier field All active carriers can be selected see Active carriers on page 101 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier AUTO on page 269 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer on page 269 Defining Reference Powers Manually Alternatively to performing a measurement to determine the reference powers for MCWN measurements you can define them manually Note that reference power levels depend on the modulation characteristics For details see chapter 5 15 3 Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Measurements on page 75 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 270 Power Level Defining Reference P
347. mmand is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Retrieving Results Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix Slot lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Crest factor Default unit dB Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL CRESt Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL MAXimum READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL MAXimum This command starts the measurement and reads out the maximum power for the selected slot for all measured frames This command is
348. mode corresponds to a correlation with the given TSC This mode can be used for continuous but framed signals or bursted signals Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Burst Search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Note For Burst no demodulation measurements e g Modulation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported None Do not synchronize at all If an external or power trigger is chosen the trigger instant corresponds to the frame start Tip Manually adjust the trigger offset to move the burst to be ana lyzed under the mask in the Power vs Time measurement Note For None no demodulation measurements e g Modulation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 254 Measure only on Sync If activated default only results from frames slots where the Slot to Measure was found are displayed and taken into account in the averaging of the results The behav ior of this option depends on the value of the Synchronization parameter Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY on page 255 UO Correlation Threshold This threshold determines whether a burst is accepted if Measure only on Sync is acti vated If the correlation value between the ide
349. mote orent E e E 101 114 153 Source Configuration softkey 101 145 Source connection errors ssesssssss 348 Source Radio frequency RF 102 146 Input sample rate ISR Digital e EE 105 Input sources Analog Baseband s Digital l GF EE Input Frontend eu EE Input output MCWN remote fr TT EE Intermodulation MOWN n Measurement MCWN ReS llS enee e iere deret ed Intermodulation IM Calculatioti ege estere ten 78 K Keys LINES not used metet tete 87 139 MKR gt 173 MKR FUNCT not use 87 139 Peak Search RUN CONT RUN SINGLE isasun anini 125 162 L Limit check Active Ten 190 Calculating o ian iiti sit re te EAER 69 70 Modulation Spectr sissien makaan 69 Multiple carriers Power vs TIME aic chien rr noter o van ida b Iestricting SpectEUlm oceano tt reta ttn Transient Spectrum Troubleshooting ttes er toria rer nes en een Limit lines Exceptions MCWN A 166 SDOGCITUT RE Time alignimeb sss erem dent evene ei te tto e Limit Time Alignment s Linearized GMSK pulse ten nter retten 61 Filler inedia ved nescire bn ER rx imd ode tte dede 98 EO feedthro gli iit ette 103 146 Magnitude Capture Evaluation method Results remote Trace Cala pL Magnitude Error Evaluation method RESUS remolg 4 nire e vee sevens Marker table Il ue Udo WEE Evaluation
350. mple READ BURS IQOF SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak value of the Magnitude Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Magnitude Error see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Magnitude error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS MERR PEAK SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Magnitude Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single
351. n on page 82 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 266 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is not available in MSRA mode Remote command CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 265 Automatic Frame Configuration When activated a single auto frame configuration measurement is performed Note This function is not available in MSRA mode if the Sequencer is active The auto frame configuration measurement may take a long time therefore it is deacti vated by default The following parameters are detected and automatically measured Active slots Slot configuration burst type modulation filter TSC Equal time slot length For VAMOS normal burst and GMSK TSCs of set 1 and set 2 For VAMOS normal burst and AQPSK TSCs of both subchannels restrictions see Restriction for auto frame configuration on page 51 and SCPIR Remote command CONF AUTO FRAM ONCE see CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE on page 264 Automatic Trigger Offset If activated the
352. n N16Qam Normal burst 16 QAM modulation N32Qam Normal burst 32 QAM modulation N8PSk Normal burst 8PSK modulation NAQPsk Normal burst AQPSK modulation NGMSk Normal burst GMSK modulation RST NGMS CONF MCAR CARR3 MTYP AQPS See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 See Modulation on page 101 11 5 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation lt Mode gt This command describes the measurement setup for multicarrier measurements Parameters lt Mode gt CONTiguous Setup contains one subblock of regularly spaced carriers only NCONtiguous Setup contains two subblocks of carriers with a gap inbetween The position of the gap between the subblocks must be defined using CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier on page 218 RST CONT Example CONF MCAR FALL NCON Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Carrier Allocation on page 100 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier lt CarrNo gt This command defines the position of the gap for non contiguous setups see CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation on page 218 Parameters lt CarrNo gt Number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Range 1 16 RST 1 Example CONF MCAR FALL NCON G
353. n products Thus a new separate measurement is User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 71 5 15 1 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application the Multicarrier Wideband Noise Mea surement MCWN This measurement comprises e Q based measurements on the carriers to determine their power levels and refer ence powers e Frequency sweeps with RBWs of 100 kHz to measure wideband noise and 300 kHz to measure intermodulation products e Gated zero span measurements with an RBW of 30 kHz to measure narrowband noise e MCOWN Measurement PEIOCOSS d nct cecinere e nd ten ar ede es tib d 72 e Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation 73 e Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Measurements 75 e limit Check for MOWN Resulis rtc ee e es t Ee rt er es tt 76 Jnteimodulatiom CaleulatlOFE reri er vr aaa ties c e ed ere ia Fete i a 78 e Wideband Noise Measurement 80 MCWN Measurement Process The MCWN measurement consists of several sub measurements and may include averaging processes Reference measurement Optionally a reference measurement is carried out to obtain suitable reference power values for the actual noise measurement The reference measurement can determine the reference powers of the active carrier with the maximum power level or optionally measure just one selected carrier Several reference measurements can be performed subsequently to calcul
354. n spectrum graph measurement LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MSFD Result 2 INITiate IMMediate JI Switch off the display of all available traces DISPlay WINDow2 TRACel MODE BLANk DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 MODE BLANK JI Switch on the display of all available traces again DISPlay WINDow2 TRACel MODE AVERage DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 MODE WRITe Manual operation See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 See Trace Mode on page 169 11 7 2 2 Analyzing GSM Measurements Table 11 4 Available traces and trace modes for the result diplays Measurement Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Magnitude Capture WRITe 7 Constellation Graph EVM AVERage MAXHold MINHold WRITe Phase Error Magnitude Error PvT Full Burst Modulation Spectrum Graph AVERage WRITe Transient Spectrum Graph Trigger to Sync WRITe PDFavg histogram Spectrum Graph MCWN mode AVERage Marker Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Up to 4 markers can be configured e Individual Marker Gettngs AAA 284 e General Marker Salllligs cc cn ertt e ee e e t dett c dde ove te descr eed 286 e Marker Positioning Set ngs iecit zit ti critici ee 286 Individual Marker Settings In GSM evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time the follo
355. nalyzers both a normal and a wide modulation spectrum were available for GSM measurements In the R amp S FSW GSM application only one evaluation is provided The frequency range of the fre quency list however can be configured to be wider or narrower see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 135 The RBW and VBW are then adapted accordingly Note RBW at 1800 kHz As opposed to previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers in which the RBW at 1800 kHz was configurable the R amp S FSW configures the RBW and VBW automatically according to the selected frequency list see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 135 For the Modulation Spectrum Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz For the Modulation Spectrum Table they are set according to table 4 6 depending on the measured Device Type and the number of active carriers as defined in the Signal Description settings Table 4 6 RBW settings for Modulation Spectrum Table measurements according to standard Offset Single carrier BTS Multicarrier BTS Multicarrier BTS MS mode N21 N gt 1 lt 1 8 MHz 30 kHz 30 kHz 9 30 kHz 2 30 kHz 4 1 8 MHz 30 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 3 100 kHz 9 gt 1 8 MHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 3 100 kHz 9 1 See 3GPP TS 51 021 8 6 5 1 2 c d 2 See 3GPP TS 51 021 8 6 12 2 3 See 3GPP TS 51 021 8 6 5 1 2 f 4 See 3GPP TS 51 010 1 8 13 4 4 2 f and 3GPP TS45 0
356. nc time Default unit S Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM JI Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set external trigger mode TRIGgerl SEQuence SOURce EXTernal Set minimum capture time to speed up measurement SENSe1 SWEep TIME MINimum Auto set trigger offset Note Correct frame slot configuration assumed CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE JI Activate Trigger to Sync measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT TGSG LAY ADD 1 BEL TGST Query standard deviation of trigger to sync time II Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURS PTEM TRGS SDEV Usage Query only Limit Check Results The following commands are required to query the results of a limit check Currently limit check results can only be queried for the following result displays e PvT Full Burst Modulation Spectrum Graph Transient Spectrum Graph Spectrum Graph Useful commands for retrieving limit check results described elsewhere READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL on page 324 Retrieving Results FETCh SPECtrum MODulation LIMit FAIL on page 333 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving limit check results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA cc ccccescecseseneeeeeeeeceteceeenenenenesenensaaaeae
357. nce LEVel BBPower on page 239 Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURCe EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital UO data input and output INPOR DIO CDE Wie p m 223 INPut BIQ RANGe UPPer AUTQO 2 cadens eoi Euri a cuc en pu eate eee Tn 224 INPutDIOXRANGSICODPIFIg EE 224 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Ier ele ee UPPE BEN 224 INPubbIO3XSANGSIUBPeFPEUNLIT iod eo enean tans eu ER Rex OE ERE ERE obe necatus 225 INPut DIO SRATO T 225 NPU DIG SRAT E 225 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For details see the section Interface Status Information for the optional Digital Base ban
358. nce power in Hz Example READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate Usage Query only READ AUTO LEVTime This command is used to perform a single measurement to detect the required refer ence level and the trigger offset automatically Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE and CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE for new remote control programs Parameters PASSED Fixed value irrelevant Dummy Fixed value 0 irrelevant Return values ReferenceLevel The detected reference level Default unit variable lt TriggerOffset gt The detected time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep lt TriggerLevel gt The detected trigger level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm Example READ AUTO LEVT PASSED 9 2404 0 00000007695 1 4 0 Usage Query only Programming Examples READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Wide Modulation Spectrum measurements It is identical to READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATing andis maintained for compatibility reasons only Example READ SPEC WMOD GAT Usage Query only Mode GSM 11 13 Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to configure and perform GSM measure ments in a remote environment e Programming Example Determining the EVM et cette 364 e Programming Example Measu
359. nd controls the time alignment of the limit lines for the Power vs Time measurement see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Parameters for setting and query Mode STMeasure PSLot STMeasure For each slot the mid of TSC is derived from the measured mid of TSC of the Slot to measure and the timeslot lengths speci fied in the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 PSLot For each slot the mid of TSC is measured This provides reason able time alignment if the slot lengths are not according to standard However the Power vs Time limit check is also passed RST STMeasure Example CONF BURS PTEM TAL PSL Manual operation See Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 7 2 Spectrum The modulation and transient spectrum measurements allow for further configuration CONFigure SPEGCIrumm IMIEBEFT iaiiuue ence snes aden terae adana iria Geh ne 260 CONFIgunE SPEC tronic Blue e utu d tat oido res ne eee e et atreve ttc to reet 260 GONFig re SPECtrum SWITchihg TYBE EE 261 GONFigure SPECtrum SWITchifig L MIT aao antro In Ro notre eren a Rennes 261 CONFIgure SPEC trum MO Dulation bl MET oto terna Pee Pune reri tenere 261 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect iiie estes sinas 262 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE ce
360. ndard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 there are either eight slots of equal length 156 25 NSP or slot O and slot 4 have a length of 157 NSP while all other slots have a length of 156 NSP For details see chapter 5 11 Timeslot Alignment on page 65 The timeslot length is defined as the distance between the centers of the TSCs in suc cessive slots By setting the Limit Time Alignment parameter to Per Slot the Delta to Sync values can be measured and used in order to verify the timeslot lenghts Setting the Limit Line Time Alignment to Slot to measure displays the expected val ues according to the standard and depending on the value of Equal Timeslot Length These values are summarized in Expected Delta to Sync values in normal symbol periods Slot to measure 0 No of slots 8 and First slot to measure 0 5 13 5 13 1 Limit Checks Table 5 7 Expected Delta to Sync values in normal symbol periods Slot 0 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Number to mea sure Equal 0 156 25 312 50 468 75 625 00 781 25 937 50 1093 75 Timeslot Length On Equal 0 157 313 469 625 782 938 1094 Timeslot Length Off Limit Checks e Limit Check for Modulation Gpechum annenin 69 e Limit Check for Transient SDeCU ITI orte ennt e ileal tee e aude 70 e Limit Check for Power vs TimebResults nennen 70 Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum The determined Modulation Spectrum values in the average Avg
361. ndards The I Q data from the GSM signal applied to the RF input of the R amp S FSW is captured for a specified measurement time This data is demodulated and synchronized with a reference signal to identify the individual frames and slots The slots of interest are then analyzed in order to display the spectral and power results either graphically or numerically and to calculate the modulation parameters The standard distinguishes between single slot and multi slot measurements Single slot measurements analyze one slot referred to as the Slot to measure within the GSM frame which consists of 8 slots in total Modulation specific parameters such as the phase error EVM or spectrum due to modulation are determined on a per slot basis Multi slot measurements on the other hand analyze a slot scope of up to 8 con secutive slots each of which has different burst modulation characteristics Power vs time limit checks and the transient spectrum measurements for example are deter mined for multiple slots Statistical evaluation of several measurements is also possible Finally the GSM mea surement results can be exported to other applications GSM UO Measurement Results 4 Measurements and Result Displays 4 1 The R amp S FSW GSM application provides two different measurements in order to deter mine the parameters described by the GSM specifications The default GSM UO measurement captures the UO data from the GSM signal The
362. nds a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 243 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel on page 243 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 244 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 244 6 3 4 Tr
363. ndwidth for multi carrier Power vs Time measurements Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Parameters for setting and query Type MC400 MC300 MC400 Recommended for measurements with multi channels of equal power MC300 Recommended for measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to suppress adjacent active channels RST MC400 Example CONF MCAR FILT MC400 CONFigure MS MCARrier STATe lt State gt CONFigure MS MCARrier MCBTs lt MultiCarrierBTS gt This command informs the R amp S FSW K10 that the measured signal is a multicarrier signal If active a special multicarrier filter is switched into the demodulation path and further multicarrier specific parameters become available Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For new remote control programs select a multicarrier device type using CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 203 Parameters for setting and query lt MultiCarrierBTS gt ON OFF ON Sets the device type to Multicarrier BTS Wide Area OFF Sets the device type to BTS Normal RST OFF Example CONF MCAR MCBT ON New program example CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE MCBWide Example CONF MCAR MCBT OFF New program example CONFigure MS DEVice
364. nels Depending on the Device Type single carrier or multicarrier different PvT filters are supported 1 MHz Gauss default for single carrier device 600 kHz single carrier only for backwards compatibility to FS K5 500 kHz Gauss single carrier only for backwards compatibility to FS K5 400 kHz multicarrier default for multicarrier device Recommended for measurements with multi channels of equal power 300 kHz multicarrier Recommended for multicarrier measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels Remote command CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer on page 258 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Limit Line Time Alignment Controls how the limit lines are aligned in a Power vs Time measurement graph see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Limit lines are defined for each slot The limit lines are time aligned in each slot based on the position of the TSC the center of the TSC is the reference point This parameter affects how the center of the TSC is determined for each slot Slot to measure default For each slot the center of the TSC is derived from the measured center of the TSC of the Slot to Measure and the timeslot lengths speci fied in the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 and Equal Timeslot Length on page 94 Per Slot For each slot the center of the TSC is m
365. nfiguring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Return values Name Name string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 221 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values State DETected NDETected RST NDETected Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values Type String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 2 5 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 242 DIAG ROSIE SERVICE NSOU CC E 231 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE
366. ng e Use an external trigger which indicates the frame start In this case the minimum allowed capture time is reduced from 10 ms to 866 us see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 Measure only slots at the beginning of the frame directly after the trigger see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 126 e Use a small statistic count see Statistic Count on page 124 Note MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The Capture Time for the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA mode defines the length of the application data extract see also chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual The Capture Time can also be defined using the softkey which is available from the SPAN BW or SWEEP menus Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 245 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 246 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 292 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the
367. ng Slots within the defined slot scope are highlighted green N The defined Slot to Measure is highlighted blue the burst type and modulation defined m for this slot are indicated to the right of the graphic Frame configuration in the Frame and Slot Scope dialog boxes The same graphic is displayed in the Frame Configuration of the Frame dialog box see Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure on page 95 and in the Slot Scope tab of the Demodulation dialog box see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 126 Demodulation Settings Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Single Slot Measurements Slot to Measure No Slots to Measure s First Slot to Measure 2 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure Norm Norm Fig 5 6 Frame configuration in Slot Scope settings This graphic can be interpreted as follows e Each slot is represented by its number 0 to 7 e Slot numbers within the defined slot scope are highlighted green The number of the defined Slot to Measure is highlighted blue Active slots are indicated by polygonal symbols above the number which contain the following information G M P u GJ User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 Sg Overview of filters in the R
368. ng Trigger Baseband RF on page 107 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 2 4 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENSe IPROBe p SETup GC MOPFfsel riore erret ree EERSTEN 228 SENSeJPROBesp ID PARTRUNIDQE cte ri etr nee Rene Raten TEET 228 I SENSeTPROBESp ID SRNUNDOF E 229 SENSe PROBe sp SETup MODE 2 t toii eerie ey tetuer eye KAREN 229 Ei Ee Ne E TE 229 SENSe PROBesp SETuptS LATG9 oii siuccs creta tee Corne a Rae atit aded Fa Rae Rayo LA FER o 230 ISENSeTPROBSSps SE Pup TW audaci e etna tena aene to rae e bn Ree ce e eux rk sauce 230 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup CMOFfset lt CMOffset gt Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters lt CMOffset gt Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V Manual operation See Common Mode Offset on page 108 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1121
369. ng example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Selecting the Measurement Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 86 11 4 Selecting the Measurement In addition to the default GSM UO measurement a new separate measurement is now available for multicarrier wideband noise see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 GONFiguire MEASUPOMe Nt irsini dno ne eure dee sve de vive eda do s Rana dul ain 202 CONFigure MEASurement lt MeasType gt This command selects the measurement to be performed in the GSM application Note if you switch between the IQ measurement and MCWN measurement the enable positive and negative transition settings in the status registers are set to their default values Thus you must reconfigure the transitions after switching measure ments if necessary See chapter 11 10 4 Querying the Status Registers on page 351
370. ngs see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 Slot is not in defined slot scope Include the slot in the slots to measure see chap ter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 126 Sync not found Possible causes Possible solutions Training sequence TSC or sync is not defined cor rectly Check the TSC sync definition in Slot settings see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 No or incorrect position of access burst in slot defined The trigger event does not correspond to the start of the active part in slot 0 Define the correct Timing Advance for the slots containing an access burst see Timing Advance Access Burst only on page 98 Correct the trigger offset for an external trigger see Trigger Offset on page 119 The DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the sig nal Swap the and Q values after data acquisition in the R amp S FSW GSM application to reverse this effect see Swap Q on page 123 11 d 11 1 Introduction Remote Commands to Perform GSM Mea surements The following commands are required to perform measurements in the GSM applica tion in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see t
371. ngs affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 6 3 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 101 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 235 INPut GAIN VALue on page 235 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration aleet EI Lee TT tener m e eret eren eter aaa tente ede terea ere eda 115 LF UE PVG QUINCY ERR 115 NOISE Sales 115 aiee Ce E E
372. nt filler eeschter net eae 58 Magnitude respotse reete tren 59 Measurement time REMOTE 65 05 PP 245 246 Measurements Selecting dedo Hsec ed 85 90 141 Ke 17 Microbutton PRODOS m 108 Midamble see also KT 50 MINIMUMI 2 eie 174 Marker POSITIONING ces rere 174 MKR gt ROY M M 173 delen v aep 11 iler t 98 Carriers 101 145 Detant e M 139 Bere 59 Inverted UO remote eene 245 Inverted Q cients enr etai dte die 123 ioo TEE 49 Modes remote 210 Number of SC le ice beetnie 99 RBW at 1800 KHZ rre tree 24 26 135 Modulation Accuracy Evaluation method 2 ede phot 21 Parameters cinereo eet 22 25 28 Results remote ie ne 303 Modulation Spectrum Graph results remote Graph evaluation method Limit check ge Ei e EE EE Table results remote T Table evaluation method s nnsssssssiinssseeeenrnneeeen 24 Table frequency list retirer ntt 135 MS Mobil Station 2 2 1 eie bere 378 MSRA Analysis interval MEWN ie Operating mode MSRA applications Capture OffSel 2 e adt 123 Capture offset remote AAA 292 MSRA Master RW eee recen Multi standard radio MSR signals Multicarrier BTS Settings oni te Ur GR Nes 99 144 Multicarrier Wideband Noise measurements See MCWN T 34 Multiple Meas
373. ntation of the configuration of each slot Select a slot to display its Slot dialog box see chapter 6 3 2 3 Slot Settings on page 95 For active slots the following information is shown e The burst type e g Normal NB for a normal burst e The modulation e g GMSK e The training sequence TSC and Set For details on how to interpret the graphic see Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar on page 54 Slot Settings The Slot settings are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Signal Description or Demodulation button then Switch to the Slot tab e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Slot to Measure softkey The individual slots are configured on separate tabs The dialog box for the selected slot is displayed directly when you select a slot in the Frame Configuration graphic on the Frame tab see Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure on page 95 To configure a different slot select the corresponding vertical tab in the Slot tab Slot structure display The basic slot structure according to the selected Frequency Band and Power Class is displayed graphically for reference White fields indicate unknown data colored fields indicate known symbol sequences The slot settings vary slightly for different burst types Signal Description Frame Slot O Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot Mult
374. nz GEOuencer IMMecdate AAA 250 ll NEI E ee ele RTE 250 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate MIN UE AT MAU TEE Jl IN REI SIE DA Le WE 236 INPut AT Tenuation PROTection E 219 MIN FUT ONIN GCs eaten ose tee ERO NPU GOURIN M ll D se Ver pe INPut DIQ RANGe COUPIling elei aile METTEG INPut DIG RANGe UPP r AUTO nee nre pere Ert er hern rare ee RR OE eee ER AREA e PEE 224 INPut iDIG RANGe UPPer UJINIT cease siete RE Ro in YER E cone YE F eene PE EF eR FC TUR EETR EN FREE UE E Sosa STRE Xp ENE 225 INPUEDIQES Aur 225 INPUtDIQ SRATS AUT e 225 INPOC DRAT E 220 INPUGEAT EE 236 NEE amplo 237 UNENEE T STAT 6 ET 237 INPutFIETeCHPASSES ATO rt tare rep hi ee erm n eer Cer eee eee decr dpt e ee ON TINTE 220 INPut FILTer YIG STATe ly gue T By E INPUutGAINEMALU suite tbe eere ett tr reete e eb aves er en EE EET re gero EXT hwanalbuocum c S lei dee KETTEN NK M 226 INPut IQ EULESCale AUTO EE 226 INPut IQ FULLscale E EE 226 INPut IQ TYPE S INPUT SELEG uerger UR INST ment CREate RR EE 198 NN ele LE TEE 198 INSTr ment CREate NEW oett eren ter ern Dn ente eere re ner rr nne ee npe i Perdu 198 INS Tr ment DELete iienaa eege E e Edda Cede i Eck ua fe rca 199 INS KU Ion ue HIS c 199 INSTrument REName
375. odulation Spectrum results are based on the Slot to Measure see Modula tion Spectrum Graph on page 23 The results of all Transient Spectrum dia grams are based on the slot scope i e on the interval defined by the First Slot to measure and the Number of Slots to measure see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 e Allresults that require demodulation of one slot and statistical analysis e g Modu lation Accuracy Phase Error and EVM are based on the Slot to Measure The slot scope is defined in the Demodulation Settings see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 126 and it is indicated by a filled green box in the Frame Configu ration see figure 5 6 The Slot to Measure is indicated by a filled blue box Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar In the channel bar of the R amp S FSW GSM application as well as in the configuration Overview the current frame configuration and slot scope are visualized in a miniature graphic Furthermore the burst type and modulation of the Slot to Measure are indica ted Device Band BTS Normal E Slot Scope azzzzzc2cuE NB GMSK Fig 5 5 Frame configuration in GSM application channel bar The graphic can be interpreted as follows Shape Color Meaning imm Each slot is represented by a small box ua i ul Active slots are indicated by polygonal symbols R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Shape Color Meani
376. of the following e Inthe Overview select the Demodulation button then switch to the Slot Scope tab e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Slot Scope softkey R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Demodulation Settings Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Single Slot Measurements Slot to Measure No Slots to Measure E Time nt Spectrum First Slot to Measure f Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure eege ME EE 127 Number of Slots tomeasure nennen eene nnne nnne nennen nes nn nean 128 First SIob e BI E E 128 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Contfgoure renn 128 Slot to Measure This parameter specifies the slot to be measured in single slot measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary The following rule applies 0 s Slot to Measure s 7 The Slot to Measure is used as the only slot to measure in the following measure ments see First Slot to measure on page 128 Modulation Accuracy EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Modulation Spectrum Constellation Furthermore the Slot to Measure is used to measure the reference power for the fol lowing measurements sl User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 127 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Power vs Time Modulation Spectrum Transient Spectrum Finally the Slot to Measure is used to measure the position of its TSC which repre sents the timing reference for the Power vs Time mask limit lines of all slots See
377. og I jQ NCO Se E x H E For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input Stata EE 106 VQ TEE 106 Input Configura ONM MENT 107 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF eeseesseesssrrreseerrreerssrrsseesrreeersnnassees 107 Centor FrEQUBRG Yi icniesetecdestte eco 107 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 221 UO Mode Defines the format of the input signal jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband l If a center frequency greater than O Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate
378. ogram can only provide reasonable results if several UO captures are performed and considered In an ideal case assuming no noise the histogram would have a gaussian shape The histogram is helpful to determine the number of Trigger to Sync values to be averaged Statistic Count in order to obtain the required time resolution of the averaged Trigger to Sync value The higher the statistic count the closer the graph gets to a gaussian shape and the higher the resolution of the averaged Trigger to Sync value becomes e Trace2 the second trace is superimposed on the histogram and visualizes the probability density function PDF of the average Trigger to Sync value and the standard deviation as provided in the Trigger to Sync table This trace helps you judge the reliability of the averaged values in the table The narrower this trace the less the individual values deviate from the averaged result if this trace is too wide increase the Statistic Count Note The x axis of the histogram indicates the individual Trigger to Sync values Thus the scaling must be very small in the range of ns However since the value range in particular the start value of the possible results is not known the x axis must be adap ted to the actual values after a number of measurements have taken place This is done using the adaptive data size setting see Adaptive Data Size on page 137 This setting defines how many measurements are performed before the x a
379. ollowing windows e Magnitude Capture e PvT Full Burst Modulation Accuracy Power vs Slot R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays The following evaluation methods are available for GSM UO measurements Perle C MTS 18 EVN m EE 18 Magnitude 877 o TU v n 19 DVLA VIS OTe EM 20 Ec 21 Modulation ACCAC rea a a OAOA 21 Modulation Spectrum Graphie 23 Modulation Spebtum RE e 24 Phase EMO T 26 ccs 27 PYT RUN BUS c 28 Transient Spectrum Gra vei uiii mrs cette to reni erre reve d irre er net ds 30 Transient Spectrum Table eo rr enne x IIR ERRERE TR RR ERR PNE a ER REN ERRER RR RARE R n 31 Trigger to Syne Gore PIN mmm 32 Titgger to Syrie Tab oed eo eed pei pl eee e en aee id a dio 34 Constellation The complex source signal is displayed as an X Y diagram The application analyzes the specified slot over the specified number of bursts 2 Constellation ei Cl Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CONS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 EVM Displays the error vector magnitude over time for the Slot to Measure User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 18 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Avg e2 Max 3 Min ed Clr 3 5 sym 145 5 sym Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH ETIMe see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 297 Magnitud
380. olution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at distortion frequency Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Indicates whether absolute or relative power values are returned depending on CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT on page 261 lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP NARR INN Usage Query only Manual operation See Inner Narrow Band Table on page 40 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALL This command queries the results of the measured distortion products for the frequen cies outside of the subblocks but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier allocation For details see Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 Retrieving Results For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of distortion Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which distortion power is measured Default unit Hz lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level
381. ompleted the R amp S FSW GSM application waits for the next trigger event to start the next measurement The search for the frame start is as in Free Run mode except that the UO data capture is triggered e With the External Trigger the measurement is triggered by an external signal connected to the EXT TRIGGER input of the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW GSM application assumes that the frame start i e the active part in slot 0 directly fol lows the trigger event An external trigger requires a correct setting of the trigger offset The search is faster compared to the free run and power trigger modes Use an external trigger to maximize the measurement speed or if the frame configura tion is ambiguous i e if the slot properties are cyclic with a cycle less than the frame duration Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FSW GSM application For this purpose the trigger is considered to be in Free Run mode Refer to chapter 6 3 4 Trigger Settings on page 116 to learn more about appropri ate trigger settings and to chapter 6 3 2 Signal Description on page 90 for informa tion on the frame slot configuration Refer to Automatic Trigger Offset on page 138 to learn more about setting the trigger offset automatically 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement The R amp S FSW GSM application is s
382. on demand and availability in the network HSCSD allows permanent assignment of up to 4 slots to a mobile Normal and higher symbol rates The modulation modes GMSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM can be used with either normal or higher symbol rate and different Tx filters What is significant for the R amp S FSW GSM application in this respect is that the mobile can send power on a frequency in more than one slot 5 3 Short Introduction to VAMOS The Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot VAMOS exten sion to the GSM standard allows transmission of two GMSK users simultaneously within a single time slot Subchannels The standard specifies the downlink signal using Adaptive QPSK AQPSK modulation see 3GPP TS 45 004 where two subchannel binary sequences are multiplexed to form a single QPSK sequence The ratio of powers for the subchannels is referred to as the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR One of the subchannels is inter preted as interference The value of SCPIR affects the shape of the AQPSK constella tion For an SCPIR of OdB the constellation is square as in normal QSPK while for other values of the SCPIR the constellation becomes rectangular Training sequences TSCs A new set of training sequences TSCs has also been proposed see 3GPP TS 45 002 for GMSK signals The previous TSCs for GMSK bursts are listed as Set 1 while the new TSCs are listed as Set 2 AQPSK signals c
383. on is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt commands FETOCh BURG GbOMer GL OT ALL AVERage 318 READ BURG GbOwWer GL OT Glotz ALL AVERage oeiia aa aii aa aieiaa 318 FETCh BURSESPOWenrSLOT lt s ALISCRESU Auge iiie ierit REENEN SEH 318 READ IBURSESPOWeESEOTSSIOES ALL e 318 FETChBURGC GbOMer GL OTA M ANimum nennen emen 319 READ BURG GbOMWer GL OT Glotz ALL M Avimum enne 319 FETOChBURGC GbOMer GL OT CURbRent AVtEhRage 320 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSlIot CURRent AVERage seen 320 FETCh BURSCSPOWer SEOTsss CURRGnEORESLU dd 321 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent CRESU cccssceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeesaeeeeeeenaes 321 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT s CURRent MAXimum eese 322 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSlot CURRent MAXimum cesses 322 FETCh B RSESPOWerSLOT s DELTatosynec iiiii cro toe ste tra aa 323 READ BURSESPOWerSLOT SIot DELTatosync arret euentu hr EEEa 323 FETCII BURSESPOWSESEOT s e arenae tenete ea bue soe rr rhet den p Rar ydo LbPpc qr eei pmi 324 READ BURSESPOWer SLOT Slots EIMIEFAILS natant retenue E 324 Retrieving Results FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL AVERage READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL AVERage This command starts the measurement and reads out the average power for the selected slot f
384. on page 52 For this purpose the trigger is considered to be in Free Run mode Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 119 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 115 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 115 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger
385. only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure lt s lt First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Retrieving Results Return values Result numeric value Maximum Default unit dBm Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL MAXimum Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent AVERage READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent AVERage This command starts the measurement to read out the average power for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only ava
386. or all measured frames This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Average Default unit dBm Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL AVERage Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL CRESt READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL CRESt This command starts the measurement and reads out the crest factor for the selected slot for all measured frames This co
387. or gated measurements this setting also selects the gating source Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 119 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 115 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 115 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 241 UO Power Trigg
388. ormed subsequently to calculate an average Typically a much larger average count than for the reference measure ment is required to obtain suitable results for noise measurements thus a separate average count is available for reference and noise measurements Wideband noise and intermodulation sweeps After the narrowband noise measurement if either wideband noise or intermodulation or both are enabled frequency sweeps are performed in the defined span Since the standard requires different RBWs depending on the distance from the outermost carri ers several sweeps are required to obtain results for the complete span The first Sweep measurement is performed using an RBW of 100 kHz The second sweep mea surement is performed using an RBW of 300 kHz For more details on how intermodulation is calculated see chapter 5 15 5 Intermodu lation Calculation on page 78 For more details on how wideband noise results are determined see chapter 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement on page 80 Evaluating the results for display After all the reference and noise measurements have been performed the measured data is evaluated for the final result display This includes the following procedures e Averaging the results from several measurements e Putting the results in relation to the reference power values Merging the traces according to the distance from the carriers and the position of the intermodulation products e Performing lim
389. ors the noise inside the signal bandwidth and therefore is not recommended for narrow band signals or signals with a low signal to noise ratio Peaks in the EVM vs Time measurement see EVM on page 18 may occur if the Linear symbol decision algorithm fails In that case use the Sequence method Linear is the fastest option Sequence Symbol decision via sequence estimation This method uses an algo rithm that minimizes the symbol errors of the entire burst It requires that the tail bits in the analyzed signal are correct It has a better per formance lower symbol error rate compared to the Linear method especially at low signal to noise ratios but with a loss of measure ment speed This method is recommended for normal bursts with 16QAM or 32QAM modulation and for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse Tip Use this setting if it reduces the EVM RMS measurement result Remote command CONFigure MS DEMod DECision on page 256 Tail amp TSC Bits The demodulator in the R amp S FSW GSM application requires the bits of the burst tail data TSC data tail to provide an ideal version of the measured signal The data bits can be random and are typically not known inside the demodulator of the R amp S FSW GSM application tail and TSC bits are specified in the Slot dialog box see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 Detected The detected Tail and TSC bits are used to construct the ideal s
390. ort and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the UO baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture UO data using the UO Analyzer application if available and then analyze that data later using the R amp S FSW GSM application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values UO data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual UO data import and export is only available for Modulation Accuracy m
391. orting System Bit No Meaning 6to 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 11 10 3 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register This register contains information about the state of the digital UO input and output This register is used by the optional Digital Baseband Interface The status of the STATus QUESTionable DIQ register is indicated in bit 14 of the STATus QUESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition on page 349 and STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt on page 350 Bit No Meaning 0 Digital UO Input Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital Baseband Interface of the analyzer 1 Digital UO Input Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 2 Digital UO Input Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 3 Digital UO Input PLL unlocked This bit is set if the PLL of the Digital UO input is out of lock due to missing or unstable clock provided by the connected Digital UO TX device To solve the problem the Digital UO connection has to be newly initialized after the clock
392. ote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the GSM Application GSM measurements are performed in a separate application on the R amp S FSW To activate the GSM application 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the GSM item Understanding the Display Information GSM The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the GSM application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the GSM Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 6 3 1 Configuration Overview on page 88 Remote command INSTrument SELect on page 201 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application Th
393. ou must reconfigure the transition after switching measurements if necessary Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Negative Transition Part STATus OPERation NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Note if you switch between the IQ measurement and MCWN measurement the transi tion is set to its default value Thus you must reconfigure the transition after switching measurements if necessary Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Positive Transition Part STATus OPERation PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt SumBit
394. ource for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input e m Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes Radio Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Impedance Digital I 9 V Direct Path Analog High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz Baseband YIG Preselector Input Connector ueteris aueens 102 uer AING e 103 Direct Pai estes sce 103 Figli Pass Filter Vcd Ha tien eR nnn cdit RE aa 103 dl 103 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 219 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration P SSS SSS Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 Q or 75 Q 75 Q should
395. ow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Analyzing GSM Measurements Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker
396. ower Table Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus d Note that the configuration Overview depends on the selected measurement type Configuration for the default UO measurement Modulation Accuracy etc is described in chapter 6 3 1 Configuration Overview on page 88 Modulation Carr 1 i ail ant Le set et Noi Av ec j na amp Es Signal Description Input Frontend Trigger Data Acquisition La E3 w Reference Meas Noise Meas Result Config Display Config sure Ne Y Axis arrow 1 8MHz Wide gt 1 8MHz ulation Exceptions Select Measurement Fig 6 4 Configuration Overview for MCWN measurement In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measur
397. ower values are returned lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP IMPR INN Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Usage Query only Manual operation See Inner IM Table on page 38 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts OUTer ALL This command queries the results of the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified using CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder for the frequencies outside of the subblocks but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier allocation For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of intermodulation Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which intermodu lation power is measured Default unit Hz Retrieving Results lt IMOrder gt 315 35 Order of the intermodulation 3 IM order 3 5 IM order 5 35 IM orders 3 and 5 lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at IM frequency Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS
398. owers Manually Manually defined carrier power level to be used as a reference for MCWN measure ments If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 163 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel on page 270 Ref Power RBW 300 kHz Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined reference power level measured with an RBW of 300 kHz for MCWN measurements If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 163 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer on page 270 Ref Power RBW 100 kHz Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined reference power level measured with an RBW of 100 kHz for MCWN measurements If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 163 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer on page 270 6 4 8 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Ref Power RBW 30 kHz Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined reference power level measured with an RBW of 30 kHz for MCWN measurements If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 163 t
399. p S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays JEE Ref Level 0 00 d m Device Band MC BTS Wide Area E GSM 900 Att 10dB Carriers 6 Ref Meas Auto 1 Spectrum Graph Start 943 0 MHz 10001 pts 1 4 MHz Stop 957 0 MHz 2 Outer Narrow Band Table Meas Freq Power a Offset MHz Freq MHz RBW kHz dB dBm amp to Limit 3 Inner Narrow Band Table Meas Freq Offset MHz Freq MHz RBW kHz For each of the following regions the parameters described in Narrowband noise results are shown e frequencies to the left of the lowermost carrier e frequencies to the right of the uppermost carrier The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute measurement frequency The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the lowermost carrier of the lower sub block and the uppermost carrier of the upper sub block For Narrow Band Noise measurements the frequency offsets are lower than 1 8 MHz 400 kHz 600 kHz 1200 kHz Outer Narrow Band Noise results are shown for contiguous AND for non contiguous carrier allocation E User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 41 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements Outer Narrow band results Active carriers Inner Narrow band results lt 400 KHz gt lt 400 KHz f lt 600 KHz 600 KHz 1200 KHz 1200 KHz gt Fig 4 3 Narrowband noise results The following parameters are shown Table 4
400. p S instr user FSW 26_ 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip S NDebugNFSW 26 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip Usage Query only Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibil ity Note that the following commands are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the specified alternative commands for new remote control programs CONFigure BURStETIMe IMMediate sesenta 356 CONFloure BURGCMACCuracvt MMediatel aaa aidaa 356 CONFigure BURSt MERRor IMMediate cei 356 CONFioure BURGCbtERrort MMedatel nennen nennen nnns 356 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate IMMediate eese 356 GONFigure BURSEPTEMplate SEL6ect 2 n reete tei Coen EE See 356 CONFloure SGbtChrum MODulsattont MMedatel en nememn 356 E Lee Weien eiue rrt utate ref cred lepore aer puede chant 356 CONFloure SGbtChrum SWlTchingal IMMedlatel nennen 356 GONFigure TROSDUIMMediale EE 356 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IM Mediate sees 356 CONFIgurerMSEMUE TEBURSEGONStOll rper rta e cott tex etta nett 356 CONFigure MST MUETEBURSEDEMedulafiori 5 2 2 error rires 356 GONFigurerMS MUETEBURSEPTEMplale reote nre rte htt n eere rient tn 356 CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum MODuUlation eese 356 CONFigure MSEMUETIESPECtr m SWITchihg 22i ire rede ture ora acce nuce is 357 EE Lee Dee EE E KEE 357 CONFigure MS BSEaEeli
401. p result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Result Configuration Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistic Count determines the number of averaging procedures PDFAvg Displays the probability density function PDF of the average value Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 282 Preset All Traces Restores the active traces and trace modes defined by the default settings for the active result displays Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t STATe on page 282 7 1 2 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Up to 4 markers can be configured Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Result Config button then switch to the Marker tab e Press the MEAS CONFIG MKR or MKR TO key then select the Marker Config softkey Individual Marker Gettnges nennen 170 e General Marker eltinmgs rca ete e cetur eee br te rude E dr deum 172 Marker Positioning FUNCIONS oiii reete trece ie ED iE ru ELE Pe REEL RAE Eca 1
402. page 274 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to t
403. ptional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ register for IQ measurements Readout deletes the contents of the EVEN section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Status Reporting System Example STAT QUES DIQ Usage Query only 11 10 4 Querying the Status Registers The following commands are required to query the status of the R amp S FSW and the GSM application For more information on the contents of the status registers see chapter 11 10 1 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register on page 346 chapter 11 10 3 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register on page 348 e General Status Register Commande 351 e Reading Gut ihe EVENT Paths cec avn 352 e Reading Out the CONDOM Patti sci ire eee eere tete reir Eee st eic ee 352 e Controlling thie ENABla Palit ccc tert etre entre Rn nte EE Sue 352 e Controlling the Negative Transition Part 353 e Controlling the Positive Transition Part nette 353 11 10 4 1 General Status Register Commands STATUS PRE SQt e RT T 351 Xp qgr xe Size 351 STATus PRESet This command resets the edge
404. quent measurements the result is no longer stored and the x axis and thus the dimensions of the bins is maintained at the set range The higher the Adaptive Data Size the more precise the x axis scaling For details see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 Remote command CONFigure TRGS ADPSize on page 264 6 3 8 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Fre 137 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 138 Automatic Frame Configuratio 2 ecce oite te x imet e A 138 Automatic Trigger Offset cicer cen crine tre nnno ze nnnm enr nant enn 138 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq This function adjusts the center frequency and ARFCN I Q mode only automatically For multicarrier measurements all carrier settings are automatically adjusted see chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 This command is not available when using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Carriers are only detected in a range of approximately 25 MHz to 2 GHz For further details see chapter 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detectio
405. r CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC SET 1 Set slot 3 On Normal burst GMSK modulation User defined TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe ON HANnel SLOT3 TYPE NB ANnel SLOT3 MTYPe GMSK HANnel SLOT3 TSC USER HANnel SLOT3 TSC CONFigure MS CONFigure MS CONFigure MS CY Er OQ CX O I CONFigure MS gt USER Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Set slot 4 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTA4 STATe OFF Set slot 5 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF Set slot 6 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF Set slot 7 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF Eeer Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 1 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g EVM modulation spectrum CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure 1 Configure slots 0 3 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 4 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 4 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence Replace detected Tail amp TSC bits by the standard bits CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits STD SssseSses PvT Measurement settings
406. r The sample rate is 19 5 MHz WSParse More compact version of WIDE The sample rate is 19 5 MHz RST WIDE Example CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect NARRow Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 135 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE Type This command switches the filter type for the resolution filter for the Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum and Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement Parameters for setting and query Type NORMal P5 NORMal Gaussian filter with a 3 dB bandwidth of either 30 kHz or 100 kHz This value is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only P5 5 Pole filter with a 3 dB bandwidth of either 30 kHz or 100 kHz This filter is required by the GSM standard specification RST P5 Example BAND TYPE NORM Manual operation See Filter Type on page 134 READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Modulation Spectrum mea surements see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 The returned values can be used to set the gating interval for list measurements i e a series of measurements in zero span mode at several offset frequencies This is done in the Spectrum mode using the SENSe LIST subsystem see SENSe LIST
407. r Mode on page 86 SENSe BURSt COUNt Count SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt These commands define the number of measurements the R amp S FSW uses to average traces In case of continuous sweep measurements the R amp S FSW calculates the moving average over the Statistic Count In case of single sweep measurements the R amp S FSW stops the measurement and calculates the average after Statistic Count measurements Parameters lt SweepCount gt If you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FSW performs one single measurement Range 0 to 32767 RST 200 11 5 6 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT OPC Starts a series of 64 measurements and waits till its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Statistic Count on page 124 See Noise Average Count on page 161 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This command returns the currently reached number of frames or measurements used for statistical evaluation It can be used to track the progress of the averaging process until it reaches the set Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 251 For Trigger to Sync measurements use the SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent command to query the number of data acquisitions that contribute to the current result Usage Query only SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent T
408. r a general overview of the measured data Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key Check the Magnitude Capture for irregular behavior e g an unexpected rise or fall in power If such an effect occurs determine whether it occured in the current slot Scope and current slot to measure compare the green and blue bars beneath the trace If necessary zoom into the display to view it in greater detail If necessary change the slot scope or slot to measure to display the slot of inter est e g using the softkeys in the GSM menu Now you can analyze the Magnitude Error Phase Error or EVM for that slot Compare the current results of the EVM with those of previous measurements to find out if the error occurs only sporadically or repeatedly R amp S9FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 9 3 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals 1 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Def
409. r more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 194 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In the GSM application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands
410. r normal symbol period bursts Nor mal bursts the middle of TSC for GMSK occurs exactly at the decision instant of sym bol 74 However for EDGE it occurs between the decision instants of symbols 73 and 74 while for reduced symbol period bursts Higher Symbol Rate bursts it occurs exactly at the decision instant of symbol 88 EDGE Symbol 73 Decision GMSK Symbol 74 Decision EDGE Symbol 74 Decision Middle of Midamble Symbol 88 Decision Normal Symbol Periods Reduced Symbol Periods Fig 5 18 Middle of TSC for normal and reduced symbol period bursts Timeslot alignment within the frame The standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 provides details on the alignment of slots within the GSM frame Optionally the BTS may use a timeslot length of 157 normal symbol periods on time slots with TN 0 and 4 and 156 normal symbol periods on timeslots with TN 1 2 3 5 6 7 rather than 156 25 normal symbol periods on all timeslots The alignment of slots therefore falls under the Not Equal Timeslot Length Equal Timeslot Length off or the Equal Timeslot Length Equal Timeslot Length on cri Timeslot Alignment terion see also Equal Timeslot Length on page 94 which are illustrated in fig ure 5 19 Sit 0 Siot 1 Sit 2 Sio 3 Slot 4 Siot5 Shot 6 Sio17 Middle ot Mode of Middle ot Middle ot Middle ot Midde ot Middle of Middle of Midamble Midamble Midamble Midaenble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble 157 NSP 15
411. r several frames For details see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 The Transient Spectrum Table displays the measured power levels and their offset to the limits defined by the standard as numeric results Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded Values that exceed both limits are indicated by red characters and an asterisk next to the value and a negative A to Limit value 2 Transient Spectrum Table Offset Power Negative Offsets Power Positive Offsets dB dBm A to Limit dB dBm A to Limit Note The graphical results of the transient spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 The following values are displayed IESSE User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 31 GSM UO Measurement Results Table 4 9 Transient spectrum results Result Description Offset Fixed frequency offsets from the center frequency at which power is measured kHz Power Negative Power at the frequency offset to the left of the center frequency Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Power Positive Power at the frequency offset to the right of the center frequency Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power
412. r the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 235 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 236 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately 6 4 4 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 213 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechan
413. rData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd UO Data File Format iq tar Element Samples Description Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies
414. rder to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is not available in MSRA mode Remote command CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 265 Result Configuration 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured via the Result Configuration dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Result Config button Press the MEAS CONFIG key then select the Result Config softkey ege 168 ZOOM PUNGCUOMNS ES 175 7 1 Result Configuration Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window see Specifics for on page 90 WCC OUT 168 CENT TU TERRE ER ERR 170 LES Scie S ERE TT UEM 174 7 1 4 Traces The number of available traces depends on the selected window see Specifics for on page 90 Only graphical evaluations have trace settings The following traces are activated directly after a GSM measurement channel has been opened or after a Preset Channel Table 7 1 Default traces depending on result display Result display Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Magnitude Capture Clear Write Power vs Time Average Max Hold Min Hold Clear Write EVM vs Time Phase Error vs Time Magnitude Error vs Time Constellation Graph C
415. red power levels and reference powers of all active carriers 2 Carrier Power Table Carrier Power Level Reference Power dBm No Freq MHz RBW 300 kHz RBW 100 kHz RBW 30 kHz max 1 E 8 8 4 11 9 10 2 11 9 10 1 11 9 10 1 3 GU 2 2 11 9 10 1 940 40 2 2 11 8 10 1 The following parameters are shown Table 4 11 Carrier power measurement results Parameter Description Carrier No Active carrier number as defined in chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 Additional labels max the carrier with the highest power level If the reference power is determined by a reference measurement see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 163 and automatic carrier selection is active see Carrier Selection Carrier on page 164 e ref selected carrier for reference power If the reference power is determined by a reference measurement see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 163 but the carrier is selected manually see Carrier Selection Carrier on page 164 e man manually defined reference powers see Defining Reference Powers Manually on page 164 Carrier frequency Frequency of the carrier at which power was measured Power level Measured power level in dBm Reference power with RBW Reference power for measurement with 300 kHz RBW or manually defined 300 kHz reference value User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 37 Multicarrier Wid
416. rements Remote command CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO on page 208 CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier on page 208 Frame Frame settings determine the frame configuration used by the device under test The Frame settings are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Signal Description or Demodulation button then Switch to the Frames tab R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Frame Slot Multi Carrier Device Under Test Device Type BTS Normal Frequency Band Power Class Frame Configuratior Equal Time Slot Lengths Select Slot to Configure Norm Device Type Defines the type of device under test DUT The following types are available BTS Normal BTS Micro BTS Pico MS Normal MS Small Multicarrier BTS Wide Area Multicarrier BTS Medium Range Multicarrier BTS Local Area The default device type is BTS Normal Remote command CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 203 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported e T GSM 380 e T GSM 410 e GSM 450 e GSM 480 User Manual 1 173 9263 02 11 93 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFig
417. remote Control scissa tn nokia E creda d Sra cede Select MarKer ii iiis castes innana Select meas Sequence estimator Sequencer 12 85 Aborting remote EEN 250 Activating remote 250 lj m N 86 Mode remote Seege Eder 250 MSRA 4 GSM 4i in nea prre erae 84 Remote 248 Softkey 86 State a86 WEE 978 SFH Slow frequency hopping sesssss 47 Signal capturing D rz lire eT 123 Duration remote nente 245 246 see also Data acquisition siisii 121 Signal Ee e e TE 90 MEWN oedran ea eee b td entis 141 MOWN remote ege pete Pret 266 Signal source Ee prm 221 Single Sequencer SOflKGy 5er rm tet e rete tern 86 Single sweep Softkey Single zoom Slope due be GE jog EET pei cS Active remote Active part Configuration Display Equal length First slot to Measure sornicenisnriniinrinaa 95 128 FitSt To measUre EE 53 128 253 Limit ine alignment erri tre 133 Multiple 2 2 Number to measure Parameters dependency Tee m Scope configutirig EE 126 SCOPE default sneha ennt diet Scope defining Scope display Selecting entere temet tenen Slot to measure Slate cs 97 Statistical evaluation 124 up c X 95
418. rence r aieiaa 363 READ W bechrum MODulaton HRtFerencef MMediatel renen eneneeereee 363 READ IAUT ORE WWiime EE 363 READ SPECtrum WMObDulationiGATiInG 2 2 este antro ca repe Lorena nk y E RRe uh RR YRER 364 CONFigure BURSt ETIMe IMMediate CONFigure BURSt MACCuracy IMMediate CONFigure BURStMERRor IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PFERror IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate SELect Value CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation IMMediate CONFigure SPECtrum SELect Mode CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate CONFigure TRGS IMMediate CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate These commands select a specific result display They are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chap ter 11 7 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 274 Usage Setting only CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt CONStell State CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt DEModulation State CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt PTEMplate State CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum MODulation State Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum SWITching State CONFigure MS MULTi STATe State These commands are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout com mands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 7 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 274 Note To be backwards compatible to R amp S
419. res an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 220 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 103 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available e UO Analyzer and thus in all applications in MSRA operating mode e Multi Carrier Group Delay e GSM e VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 221 Digital UO Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Digi tal Baseband Interface in the applications that support it Thes
420. ring an AQPSK Gional neern 368 e Programming Example Measuring the Power for Access Bursts 371 e Programming Example Measuring Statistics eee 373 e Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers 374 11 13 14 Programming Example Determining the EVM This example demonstrates how to configure an EVM measurement in a remote envi ronment f a a Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt aa a a Frequency and Level Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM ees Trigger settings Use these settings only if an external trigger is connected to the TRIGGER INPUT connector of the analyzer Otherwise ignore these commands Programming Examples Define the use of an external trigger TRIGger SOURce EXT Determine the offset from the trigger event to the frame start start of active part of slot 0 Define a trigger offset of 2 ys TRIGger HOLD 2us E Configuring Data Acquisition Define a capture time of 1 second gt 200 GSM frames SENSe SWEep TIME 1 s Define a statistic count of 200 i e 200 GSM frames are evaluat
421. rrrrerrreene 314 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb or HMG AVEHRage rer enrrererrrersrereesrsrerne 314 Retrieving Results READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb orHRMGCURbent dei aadi 314 READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMG MANimum ener 314 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtEbRbor HMG GDtEViaton rere rererrrrrereeene 314 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ALL READ BURSt MACCuracy ALL This command starts the measurement and returns all the modulation accuracy results For details on the individual parameters see Modulation Accuracy on page 21 When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt MeasValue gt lt Error Vector Magnitude RMS gt lt Error Vector Magnitude Peak gt lt Magnitude Error RMS gt lt Magnitude Error Peak gt lt Phase Error RMS gt lt Phase Error Peak gt lt Origin Offset Sup pression IQ Offset IQ Imbalance gt lt Frequency Error Burst Power gt Amplitude Droop gt lt 95 ile EVM gt lt 95 ile Mag Error gt lt 95 ile Phase Error gt The results are output as a list of comma separated strings For each result except for iles the Current Average Maximum and Standard Deviation values are returned Retrieving Results Example READ BURS ALL 17 283994674682617 17 283994674682617 17 283994674682617 0 24 64782333
422. s lt Level gt VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 105 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the optional Digital Baseband Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 105 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 105 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital UO input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 105 Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface The following commands are required to control the optional Analog Baseband Inter face in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 221 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 232 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPut IGEBALaneceg STA
423. s and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Introduction If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specifie
424. s on page 52 The R amp S FSW GSM application expects the trigger event to be the start of the active part in slot O Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 238 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 239 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 238 Slope For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 241 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1
425. s see Device Type on page 91 for which at least 2 carriers are configured see chap ter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 Narrowband noise is measured with an RBW of 30 kHz at 3 single offset frequencies below the lowermost active carrier of the lower sub block and above the uppermost active carrier of the upper sub block For details see Narrowband noise measurement on page 72 and Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum NNARrow on page 272 Wideband Noise 21 8 MHz If enabled wideband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Wide band noise is measured with an RBW of 100 kHz over the defined span typically the RF bandwidth For details see Wideband noise and intermodulation sweeps on page 73 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum NWIDe on page 273 Intermodulation The MCWN noise measurement performs special measurements at the locations of the intermodulation IM products of the defined order To disable intermodulation mea surement select off For details see chapter 5 15 5 Intermodulation Calculation on page 78 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder on page 271 Adapting the limit lines for wideband noise Apply Exceptions If enabled exceptions from the limit line check as defined in the 3GPP standard are applied to the limit checks of the MCWN measurements Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXCeption STATe on page 272
426. s 6 5 15 5 Intermodulation Calculation If intermodulation measurement is activated the following calculations are performed If there are N active carriers with frequencies f fo f3 fy find all possible combina tions of integer coefficients c4 C5 C3 Cy for which the following equation is true N Je M k 1 with M intermodulation order Use all those combinations of coefficients c to calculate all possible intermodulation frequencies of the given order M Example Calculating intermodulation For 3 carriers and IM order 3 these are all the theoretical combinations of c Table 5 9 Intermodulation coefficients depending on number of carriers involved 1 carrier 2 carriers 3 carriers 003 012 021 102 201 111 030 120 210 10 2 201 11 1 300 01 2 02 1 102 20 1 1 11 00 3 1 20 2 107 10 2 20 1 111 0 30 0 12 0 21 1 1 1 300 120 210 1 11 0 1 2 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 20 2 1 0 critical intermodulation Critical intermodulations For critical intermodulations the sum of all c equals 1 For example 2 f 1 f indica ted in table 5 9 They are critical because they are close to active carriers Note that for some combinations the following may apply Results are much too far away from the active carriers to be of relevance Results are negative Multicarrier and Wideband Noise Results have an identical IM frequency Therefore the R amp S FSW GSM application always c
427. s a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 244 Sweep Settings The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Reference Average Count sesenta 161 ee Ee e E 161 Continuous Sweep RUN Ree CR RE 161 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE 1 eterne tentent e Re ENEE 162 Continue Sihgle SW E 162 Reference Average Count Defines the number of reference measurements to be performed in order to determine the average reference values Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNt on page 269 Noise Average Count Defines the number of noise measurements to be performed in order to determine the average result values Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 251 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measuremen
428. s are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt commands Statistical results For most results both the current result and the statistical evaluation of all results over a number of frames specified by Statistic Count are provided For details on how the statistical evaluation is performed see table 4 2 FETCHBURSIEMACCu racy p ALL E 306 READ BURSTEMACGURCy CAM E 306 Retrieving Results FEICh BURSIEMACCuracy E ADROOp AVERGBQST 2 1 1e rado etta ert xe Fani raia lend 307 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent acere einen nennt tnnt nnn 307 FETChBURGOC MAC Curacvl ADboop MANimum eene nnne 307 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation araia anaana aaa aaa 307 READ BURG MAC CuracvltAfDRoop AVEHRage eene nennen nene 307 READ BURSIt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent esses 307 READ BURSIt MAC CuracvlADRoop MANimum nrererorererersrsennnnnn nnn 307 READ BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation ecu eeee ia 307 FETChBURGOCMACCuracvlBbOWer AVERage nennen ener 308 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent sess 308 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum
429. s cee irri etre need e reece iene 361 READ B RSIEMAGCGuracy FERRO GURROHE uii i decree hbro E E a 361 READ BURGT MACCuracvlFERRor MANimum nen eere nennen erret 361 READ BURSI MACGCuracy FERRoOr SDEVi tion ege rre ebb anette e ps 361 READ BURG MACCurscvl ER Ouency AVERage A 309 READ BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent esses nennen nT EEE rennen 309 READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum READ BURG MACCuracvlEREOuency GDEVlaton AAA 309 READ BURG MAC CurscvllOlMbalance AVEHRage nennen rennen 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQIMbalance CURRent essent 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQIMbalance MAXimum i READ BURSI MACCuracy IQIMbalance SDEViation sess 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERA GQS6 poten t eene a c ENEE 310 READ B RSI MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRerit 2 rrr eret ite nie ENNEN 310 READ BURG MACCuracvltlOOtset MANimum ethernet enne enne nenne 310 READ BURG MACCuracvllOOtiset GDEViatton eene 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERAage sss rennen rennen 311 READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent m READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum essent nennen nenne neret nnne READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation essere 311 READ BURG MACCurscvlMERRor RMG AVEhage nenne nnne neret enne 311 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent
430. s is the power measured in a bandwidth of at least 300 kHz for the TRX under test for the time slot in this test with the highest power RMS Default The reference power is the RMS power level measured over the useful part of the Slot to Measure and averaged according to the defined Statistic Count Peak The reference power is the peak power level measured over the selected slot scope see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 126 and its peak taken over Statistic Count measurements GSM frames Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE on page 261 6 3 7 3 Trigger to Sync The Trigger to Sync measurement allows for further configuration Power vs Time Spectrum Trigger to Sync Trigger to Sync Histogram Adaptive Data Size User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 EI Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration No of Bins Specifies the number of bins for the histogram of the Trigger to Sync measurement For details see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 Remote command CONFigure TRGS NOFBins on page 264 Adaptive Data Size Specifies the number of measurements I Q captures after which the x axis of the Trigger to Sync histogram is adapted to the measured values and fixed for subse quent measurements Up to the defined number of measurements the Trigger to Sync value is stored When enough measurements have been performed the x axis is adapted to the value range of the stored results For subse
431. s on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 21 See X value on page 171 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first 11 9 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 248 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See M
432. s to measure If the Limit Check indicates FAIL zoom into the Power vs Time graph to deter mine the time at which the power exceeded the limit Note in measurements according to standard the delta value will be identical for all slots in the scope due to the Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to Measure set ting see step 9 Check the irregular slot in more detail in the Magnitude Capture compare the green and blue bars beneath the trace If necessary zoom into the display to view it in greater detail 9 4 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals Press the MODE key and select the GSM application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e Foraccess bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals 4 Selectthe Input Frontend button
433. ses nennen 332 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt MAXQ lisent 333 FETCh SPECtrum MODuUlation EIMIEFAIE 2 cuna cc ceto cott nete sedeo ee RE aaa 333 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts INNer ALL eeesssssssseseseeeeene eene enne 334 FETCh WSPestr m MPROducts OU TemALET sais air rte ttt nocte e ttt es 335 FETCh WSPectrum NARRoOw INNer ALL uacua recette ez dune 336 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALL cccseeceeeceeeeceececeneneeencanneaesenetendeceeeterenetens 337 FE TChW bechum RFerence POVWert ALT 338 FETCH WSPectrum WIDEbamd INNer AE iocur reet aderenti 339 FETCh WSPectr mWIDEband OUTer ALL J 2 1 riis conecte toot aee 341 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt CURR This command queries the number of bands with exceptions to the limit line that occur red for the specified limit check in the selected measurement window Suffix lt k gt 1 2 The number of the limit check to query 1 Limit check for wideband noise 2 Limit check for intermodulation at 100 kHz no exceptions allowed 3 Limit check for intermodulation at 300 kHz no exceptions allowed 4 Limit line for narrowband noise no exceptions allowed 5 Exceptions in subblock A 6 Exceptions in subblock B Retrieving Results Return values lt NoExcept gt integer Number of exceptions Example CALCulate2 LIMit1 EXC COUN CURR Queries the number of bands with
434. sesssssessessssseese eene nnne nnne 234 INPUEGAINSTA um E 235 INPutGAINEVALuel ia iren re uq khen RR a eases Sagan uuu do A ER RERER E RRERPEFER OR EESE 235 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Per Division on page 175 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 112 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 112 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces
435. sults Value Description SCPI query for result value Slot Analyzed slot number in frame s 0 7 PvT Limit Power vs Time limit for the power vs time READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot LIMit FAIL on page 324 trace of the slot defined by the standard Delta to The distance between the mid of the TSC READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot DELTatosync on page 323 Sync and the TSC of the Slot to Measure NSP NSP stands for Normal Symbol Period i e the duration of one symbol using a normal symbol rate approx 3 69us The measured Delta to Sync value has a resolution of 0 02 NSP For details see chapter 5 12 Delta to Sync Values on page 68 Power Average power in slot in current or all frames READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot CURRent AVERage Avg on page 320 dBm READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot ALL AVERage on page 318 Power Maximum power in slot in current or all READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot CURRent MAXimum Peak frames on page 322 dBm READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL MAXimum on page 319 Crest Crest factor in slot in current or all frames i e READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent CRESt dB Power Peak Power Avg on page 321 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot ALL CRESt on page 318 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results chapter 11 8 6 Power vs Slot Results on page 317 PvT Full Burst The Power vs Ti
436. sults READ WSPectrum MODulation ALL I gt 0 929200000 929200000 104 41 65 00 ABS PASSED FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Frequency Error Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Use the grams Return values Result Example Usage READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency or FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency commands in newer remote control pro numeric value Frequency error Default unit Hz READ BURS FERR SDEV Query only FETCh WSPectrum MODulation ALL READ WSPectrum MODulation ALL This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the measurement of the Modulation Spectrum of the mobile or base station These commands are retained for compatibility with previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers only For newer remote control programs use the READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL or FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL commands instead The result is a list of partial result strings separated by
437. surements eene 138 DULL me c 168 Result Configuration s cccicccccsccccccecccsceecescecssteeesscccteecesecnseecsssenaniecessassteccasasseeesecesstetees 168 ruit cM 175 QO Data Import and EXpOFL iiiii iie orn pa use on ccc eu apu nasa esoe 177 Import Export FUnctlIOns ern rnit oer ra tn npu RR oREn n RARE REX EEN AE deeg NR RARE PAREN ARRENRRRRRRRACR 177 How to Export and Import UO Data een 178 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 181 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 181 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 182 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals eene 184 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals eene 185 How to Measure Wideband Noise in Multicarrier Setups 187 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 189 Improving Performanx e neret innate nebat sn SeN NAESSENS ATE 189 Improving EVM AccCuUraCgy tenen i tenente nee kata s nne me uina n une En Eran a nn eia 189 Optimizing Limit Checks eterne nennen eanais aana 190 Error Messages nene nemine ntn senti pan n uP E Egan REB Ini nae EE u da 191 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 192
438. sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Magnitude Error see table 4 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 311 Retrieving Results Return values Result numeric value Magnitude error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS MERR RMS SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the UO Offset Sup pression When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the UO Offset Suppression see table 4 1 Return values Result numeric value IO offset suppression Default unit dB Example READ BURS OSUP SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 percentile of the Error Vector Magnitude measurement taken over th
439. t IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 Q 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Q Data File Format iq tar Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 0 0 Otol 0 Channel 0
440. t MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Phase Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Phase Error results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERR RMS SDEV Usage Query only 11 8 5 Modulation Spectrum Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation For details on the individual results see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 Retrieving Results READ vs FETCh commands Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt commands FETCh SPECtrumiMOBuUlation ALL 2 12 2 222 2 otras eur vx ch ba EENEG 315 READ SPECtrumiMODulauonl ALL 12 21 232221 iaaa iaaa EEA exa sce E Rame aSa 315 FE TCh SbtECHrumcMODulaton HRtFterence t
441. t is started Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 248 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate n IMMediate on page 249 Continue Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 248 6 4 7 Reference Measurement Settings Referen
442. t that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration Starting the GSM Application 2 Welcome to the GSM Application The R amp S FSW K10 is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform GSM measurements to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW K10 features e Measurements on downlink or uplink signals according to the Third Generation Partnership Project 3GPP standards for GSM EDGE EDGE Evolution EGPRS2 and Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot VAMOS e Measurement in time frequency or UO domains e Measurements of mobile devices MS single carrier and multicarrier base trans ceiver stations BTS Measurement of signals ith GMSK AQPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation normal or higher symbol rate Measurement of signals using different Tx filters e g narrow and wide pulse Measurements for Power vs Time Modulation Accuracy and Modulation and Tran sient Spectrum as required in the standard e Measurements of wideband noise and intermodulation products in multicarrier operation as defined in 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 Measurements of wideband noise narrowband noise and intermodulation prod ucts in multicarrier operation as defined in 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including rem
443. t TraceNumber gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 Trace name to be read out TRACe1 Average trace transient spectrum Maximum trace TRACe2 Maximum trace TRACe3 Minimum trace TRACe4 Current trace Example TRAC1 DATA TRACel Usage Query only Manual operation See EVM on page 18 See Magnitude Capture on page 19 See Magnitude Error on page 20 See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 See Phase Error on page 26 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command reads the x values time in seconds of the Power vs Time measure ment if active out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt If a trace number is defined as a parameter for this command the x values time in seconds of the Trigger to Sync measurement if active out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt are returned Retrieving Results For details see chapter 11 8 2 5 Trigger to Sync Results on page 301 Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 Trace number TRACe1 Average trace Transient Spectrum Maximum trace Trigger to Sync histogram values TRACe2 Maximum trace Trigger to Sync PDF of average trace TRACe3 Minimum trace TRAC
444. t diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 293 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 293 Multiple Zoom Ba In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 294 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 294 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 293 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 294 for each multiple zoom window X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 293 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 294 for each multiple zoom window 8 Qa Import Export Functions IO Data Imp
445. t pulse shapes the so called narrow and wide pulses The narrow pulse is the same linearised GMSK pulse as described in chapter 5 9 2 BPSK 16QAM 32QAM AQPSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate on page 61 while the wide pulse was designed based on a numerically optimized set of discrete filter coefficients Both narrow and wide pulse shapes are illustrated at the top of figure 5 14 where you can see that the center of the pulse occurs at 3T with T being the reduced symbol period For a sequence of symbols amp the transmitted sig nal is defined in the standard as Synchronization y t t iT 2 5T The transmitted signal for a sequence of symbols 5 3 where c t the transmit pulse which may be either the narrow or wide pulse Note that the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 5 5 Pulse shaping for higher symbol rate burst QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 3 This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The transmitted pulse for the first tail symbol is illustrated at the bottom of figure 5 14 where you can see that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the trans mit pulse occurs in the center of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5T EDGE Evo Transmit Pulses Narrow Pulse Wide Pulse Amplitude normalized
446. ta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 174 Analyzing GSM Measurements 11 7 2 3 Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These commands are described here DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACevtSCALelAUTO nennen nennen enne 288 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectzlSCALelMANimum 288 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MlINimum seeeeeeeee eee 288 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz lt SCALelb Dhvislon eene 289 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 289 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue cessisse nennen 289 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum sese 290 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MlNimum eeeeeeeee 290 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO State If enabled the Y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement Parameters for setting and query State OFF Switch the function off ON Switch the function on
447. table LAY out WINDow lt n gt TYPe Queries the window type of the window specified by the index lt n gt For a list of possi ble window types see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Example LAY WIND2 TYPE Response MACC Modulation accuracy Usage Query only Analyzing GSM Measurements 11 7 2 Result Config Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window EMAIL CNET 282 CSN EE 284 ES CDU 288 11 7 2 1 Traces The number of available traces depends on the selected window see Specifics for on page 90 Only graphical evaluations have trace settings DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essent nnns 282 bISPlayWINDowensTRAOBSESMODBE 1 Lie tad tent read teret ttt vues 282 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 on page 169 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 170 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command controls whether a trace is displayed or not and in which mode Each trace can only display a certain mode or nothing at all Blank table 11 4 b
448. tails are specified in chapter 4 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation with a higher symbol rate which are used in EDGE Evolution were introduced to further increase the data rate on the physical link They use a higher symbol rate 325 ksymb s but have bit rates of 2 x 325 kbit s 4 x 325 kbit s or 5 x 325 kbit s respectively The details are specified in chapter 5 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The figure below shows the modulation spectrum for both GMSK and 8PSK Modulation Spectrum GMSK 8BPSK 70 0 00 700 oo 50 am 300 200 10 D 100 200 3500 400 500 600 700 SO Frequency Offset MHz Fig 5 2 GMSK and 8PSK modulation spectrum Increasing the bandwidth multiple slots GPRS HSCSD The customers demand for higher telecommunication speeds increases the demand for bandwidth Therefore the GSM standard has to evolve constantly An example of this development is the introduction of the EDGE EDGE Evolution specification and the GPRS EGPRS2 and HSCSD modes Until now each mobile could use only one slot per frame but the new HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data and GPRS General Packet Radio Service methods will R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements allow permanent assignment of more than one slot per mobile plus dynamic utilization of multiple slots The concept behind GPRS is dynamic assignment of up to 8 slots to each mobile for data transmission depending
449. tar A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt A 2 4 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 0rg 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt lt DataFilename gt xyz complex float32 lt DataFilename gt lt Use
450. tarts a Power vs Time measurement and queries the result of the limit check for the selected slot Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Note in manual operation the result of the limit check for an individual slot is included in the Power vs Slot results see Power vs Slot on page 27 Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to perform the limit check on The selected slot must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S slot S First slot to measure Num ber of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON Pass 0 OFF Fail Example READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 LIMit FAIL Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 11 8 7 Retrieving Results For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Transient Spectrum Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation For details on the individual results see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 READ vs FETCh commands Note that two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurem
451. tate gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SPEC LIM EXC OFF Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Adapting the limit lines for wideband noise Apply Excep tions on page 166 CONFigure SPECtrum NNARrow lt State gt If enabled narrowband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Nar rowband noise is measured with an RBW of 30 kHz at 3 single offset frequencies below the lowermost active carrier of the lower sub block and above the uppermost active carrier of the upper sub block Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SPEC NNAR OFF Manual operation See Narrowband Noise 1 8 MHz on page 166 11 6 6 11 6 7 11 7 11 7 1 Analyzing GSM Measurements CONFigure SPECtrum NWIDe State If enabled wideband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Wide band noise is measured with an RBW of 100 kHz over the defined span typically the RF bandwidth Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SPEC NWID OFF Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 374 Manual operation See Wideband Noise 21 8 MHz on page 166 Adjusting Settings Automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically are described in chapter 6 4 9 Adjusting Settings Automatically on page 1
452. te ON OFF RST ON INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 125 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 250 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 201 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 86 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 201 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on pag
453. te Radio Frequency Channel Number BTS Base Transceiver Station DL Downlink MS to BTS DUT Device Under Test EDGE Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution EGPRS Enhanced General Packet Radio synonym for EDGE EGPRS2 Enhanced General Packet Radio and support of additional modulation coding schemes and higher symbol rate FDMA Frequency Division Multiplex Access GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying GPRS General Packet Radio Service GSM Global System for Mobile Communication HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switch Data IF Intermediate Frequency MS Mobile Station NSP Normal Symbol Period PCL Power Control Level PDF Probability Density Function PVT Power vs Time QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Q Data File Format iq tar SCPIR Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SFH Slow Frequency Hopping TDMA Time Division Multiplex Access TSC Training Sequence Code UL Uplink BTS to MS VAMOS Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot YIG Yttrium Iron Garnet A 2 VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a we
454. te command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 238 Slope Trigger Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 241 Hysteresis Trigger Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 239 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Settings Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 238 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger sour
455. tely in individual slots assigned by the base station dur ing connection and call establishment In the simplest case 8 mobiles share the 8 slots of a frame TDMA Frequency bands and channels The frequency range assigned to GSM is divided into frequency bands and each band in turn is subdivided into channels Each frequency channel is identified by its center frequency and a number known as the ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number which identifies the fre quency channel within the specific frequency band The GSM channel spacing is 200 kHz Communication between a mobile and a base station can be either frequency continu ous or frequency discrete distributed across various frequency channels FDMA In the standard the abbreviation SFH slow frequency hopping is used to designate the latter mode of communication Uplink and downlink Base stations and mobiles communicate in different frequency ranges the mobile sends in the uplink UL and the base station in the downlink DL The frequencies specified in the standard plus their channel numbers ARFCN are shown in the figure and table below Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution Frequency MHz 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 a E a a a A a a a a a a a E a a a a E T GSM 380 all Uplink i i Downlink T GSM 410 H GSM 450 H GSM 480 H GSM 710 H GSM 750 en
456. the useful part of the burst see 3GPP TS 45 004 2 2 Start and stop of the burst NB GMSK ON 568 samples ov oversampling factor 4 Te symbols NSP This corresponds to the useful part of the burst ov excluding the tail bits to allow the multicarrier filter to settle NB not any 142 symbols NSP only one sample per symbol ov 1 GMSK this corresponds to the useful part of the burst excluding tail symbols see 3GPP TS 45 005 Annex G normative Calculation of Error Vector Magnitude HSR any any 169 symbols RSP only one sample per symbol ov 1 this corresponds to the useful part of the burst excluding tail symbols see 3GPP TS 45 005 Annex G normative Calculation of Error Vector Magnitude NSP Normal Symbol Period symbol duration for normal symbol rate normal bursts RSP Reduced Symbol Period symbol duration for higher symbol rate HSR bursts Retrieving Results 11 8 2 2 PvT Full Burst Trace Results The Power vs Time results depend on the number of slots that are measured and thus the duration of the measurement 30 additional symbols NSP are added at the begin ning and at the end of the trace The number of trace result values is calculated as 30 lt NofSlots gt 157 30 ov where NofSlots Number of Slots Slot Scope ov oversampling factor 24 157 length of a long slot a slot can have a length of 156 156 25 or 157 symbols
457. the modulation spectrum measurement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spectrum due to modulation and wide band noise The limit is changed by 10 log N Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For new remote control programs the number of active carriers is determined by the CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRiercc STATe commands The multicarrier device type is defined using the CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 203 command Parameters for setting and query lt NofActCarriers gt RST 1 Default unit NONE Example New program CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE MCBWide CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRierl STATe ON CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier2 STATe ON CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt NofActCarriers gt STATe ON CONFigure MS MCARrier BTSClass lt BTSClass gt This command defines the base station class The specified BTS Class effects the cal culation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum mea surement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spectrum due to modulation and wide band noise and chapter 4 3 2 Base Transceiver Station search for Multicarrier BTS Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Parameters for setting and query lt BTSClass gt Range 1 to 2 RST 1 Default unit NONE Example CONF MCAR BTSClass CONFigure MS MCARrier FILTer lt Type gt This command controls the filter used to reduce the measurement ba
458. the peak result of the Error Vec tor Magnitude taken over the selected number of bursts When the measurement is started the analyzer is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the EVM results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value EVM Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PEAK AVER User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 308 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements DEEN Usage Query only For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Error Vec tor Magnitude When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the EVM results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value
459. the summary bit If a bitis 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Status Reporting System Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 Usage SCPI confirmed STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is o
460. thin the slot e Forsignals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count R amp S9FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 8 Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Spectrum Trigger to Sync and Power vs Time measurements In particular define the frequency list to be used to determine the modulation spec trum and filters to be used for multicarrier measurements 10 Select the Display Config button and select up to 16 displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 12
461. this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 265 for new remote control pro grams CONFigure MS SSEarch State This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FSW K5 only In new K10 remote scripts use CONFigure MS SYNC MODE TSC or CONFigure MS SYNC MODE ALL instead see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 254 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Parameters for setting and query State 110 ON OFF ON TSC search on OFF TSC search off RST 1 Example CONF SSE ON CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIMIT Mode This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit This command is only available when the Wide Modulation Spectrum measure ment is selected see CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate on page 356 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT command for new remote control pro grams Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example Select Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement II gated zero span measurement CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate JI Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute JI Run one measurement and query absolute list re
462. ting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters r
463. to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not orange AL the line lies within the interval white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 2 PVT Full Burst Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 5 5 Trig ger settings on page 52 In the default state in MSRA operating mode the Sequencer is active in continuous mode Thus the MSRA Master performs a data acquisition and then the active applica tions evaluate the data in turn aft
464. to reference power measured at distortion frequency Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Determines whether absolute or relative power values are returned lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP NARR OUT Usage Query only Manual operation See Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 FETCh WSPectrum REFerence POWer ALL This command returns the measured power levels and reference powers of all active carriers Return values lt CarrNo gt integer Active carrier number Range 1 16 Retrieving Results lt RefType gt Indicates whether carrier is used for reference REF carrier selected for reference power MAX carrier has the highest power level is used for reference power NONE normal carrier not used for reference RST RST value lt AbsCarrFreq gt numeric value Absolute frequency at which power was measured Default unit Hz lt AbsPow gt numeric value Measured power level absolute Default unit dBm lt AbsRef300 gt numeric value Reference power level absolute in a 300 kHz RBW Default unit dBm AbsRef100 numeric value Reference power level absolute in a 100 kHz RBW Default unit dBm AbsRef30 numeric value Reference power level absolute in a 3
465. u do one of the following Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display Config button in the Overview e Press the MEAS key Select the Display Config softkey in any GSM menu Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The GSM evaluation methods are described in chapter 4 1 GSM I Q Measurement Results on page 17 and chapter 4 2 1 Multicarrier Evaluation Methods on page 35 For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration GSM measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key When you switch a measurement channel to the GSM application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel in the GSM application a GSM modulation accuracy measurement for the input signal is started automatically with the default con figuration The GSM menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions The MARKER FUNCT and LINES menus are currently not used Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Importing and Exporting UO Data
466. uard Period Between Timeslots In terms of normal symbol periods Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of reduced symbol periods TSO and TS1 or Any other time slot pair TSO and TS1 or Any other timeslot pair period to reduced symbol period TS4 and TS5 TS4 and TS5 normal symbol 9 8 10 8 9 6 period to normal symbol period normal symbol 9 25 8 25 11 4 9 9 Delta to Sync Values Burst Transition Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of normal symbol periods Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of reduced symbol periods TSO and TS1 or Any other time TSO and TS1 or Any other timeslot TS4 and TS5 slot palr TS4 and TS5 patr reduced symbol 9 25 8 25 11 1 9 9 period to normal symbol period reduced symbol 9 5 8 5 11 4 10 2 period to reduced symbol period 5 12 Delta to Sync Values The Delta to Sync value is defined as the distance between the mid of the TSC and the TSC of the Slot to Measure The results are provided in the unit NSP which stands for Normal Symbol Period i e the duration of one symbol using a normal symbol rate approx 3 69us The mea sured Delta to Sync values have a resolution of 0 02 NSP These values are either assumed to be constant according to the 3GPP standard or measured depending on the setting of the Limit Line Time Alignment parameter Slot to measure or Per Slot According to the sta
467. ue MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value on the y axis for all traces in the specified window The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value Default unit dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value on the y axis for all traces in the specified window The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value Default unit dBm Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions For the GSM application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 5 5 1 Data Acquisi tion on page 245 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before execut ing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the GSM measurement Analyzing GSM Measurements Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CAL Culatesni gt MSRA ALING SHOW EE 291 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINEe VALUE
468. un and used trigger bandwidth for IF RF IP power triggers or trigger offset for external triggers In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer settings This information is displayed only when applicable for the current application For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Star ted manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 14 Understanding the Display Information 2 Magnitude Capture Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the Pulse application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the start and stop values for the displayed time frequency or symbol range Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar 3 About the Measurement A basic GSM measurement in the R amp S FSW GSM application includes a power vs time and a spectrum measurement as well as modulation accuracy e g EVM phase error for a GSM signal as defined by the relevant 3GPP sta
469. ure MS NETWork TYPE on page 204 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 205 Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 206 Equal Timeslot Length This parameter is only taken into account if Limit Time Alignment is set to Slot to measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 If activated all slots of a frame are considered to have the same length 8 x 156 26 normal symbol periods In this case the limit line for each slot required for the Power vs Time spectrum masks is aligned by measuring the TSC of the Slot to Measure only and using this value to align the limit line for all slots in the frame see also PvT Full Burst on page 28 If deactivated slots number 0 and 4 of a frame have a longer duration all others have a shorter duration compared to the Equal Timeslot Length 157 156 156 156 157 156 156 156 normal symbol periods See GPP TS 51 021 and 3GPP TS 45 010 chapter 6 7 Timeslot length for further details Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal on page 208 6 3 2 3 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure This area shows a graphical represe
470. urement channels ssssssssss 12 85 Multiple carriers ET 73 d RE 190 limit Check EE 190 Multiple ZOOM oct meter entree 176 N Narrow pulse ge gdEdgdee Narrowband measurement Dcricay m 42 Narrowband noise MOWN 72 73 Measuremient dic ast Cet ise totu 166 Noise IUD ES Narrowband les Wideband EE Noise measurement Average count MOWN ssessesesseseresrerersrerse 161 165 Limit lines MCWN ssssesseeeee 166 MEWN remote orte ten ret en 271 Narrowband MCWN Settings MCWN ertet dina 165 Wideband MCWN s iossoessonaiiiesceenisneia inanan 166 Non contiguous BASICS CU T3 Carrier configuration Scc UE Gap EE Limit check Kli Ee TEE Lee e ME Normal symbol period NSP see also Normal symbol period NSR Normal symbol rate Number of Slots to measure Demod O Offset Analysis interval 2 5 n tre tte tte vett 123 FREQUENCY socero erba Expo bte ee ra eese 111 150 Reference level 112 152 Optimizing Measurements ree ene tiae 189 Options Electronic attenuation ssssesusssss 113 152 High pass filter sosisini 103 147 220 Preamiplifler crei temet 114 153 Outer IM Table Res ltdis play 25i e gege o Ee 38 Outer Spectrum Table Res ltdis pla
471. urements sss 139 Configuration DVerVviIBgw eter ia RREE Fn REED IMEEM ERE KE 140 e Sighal DSS cia aec eves hel espace enit idee mc oen d n tee ee tu ce nes 141 e lnputand Frontend Settings eiit reco cep iiv p EL e aes 145 Tigger EE 156 e Dweep Gettinge resins tnnt nnns nnns enne 161 e Reference Measurement Geitings AE 162 e Noise Measurement Settings inii tis ida d ed ici cdd tana 165 e Adjusting Settings Automatically cccccecsseceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeneneceeeenseneees 166 6 4 1 Default Settings for GSM MCWN Measurements The following default settings are activated when a MCWN measurement is selected Table 6 2 Default settings for GSM MCWN measurements Parameter Value Measurement type MC and Wide Noise Spectrum Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Device type as defined channel default BTS Normal Frequency band as defined channel default E GSM 900 Carriers 1 active carrier at defined center frequency with NB GMSK modulation Reference power Maximum measured active carrier level Noise measurements Narrowband noise Wideband noise 6 4 2 CH EI Ee Overview Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Parameter Value Intermodulation measure Order 3 and 5 ments Average count Ref meas 10 Noise meas 200 Limit line exceptions Applied Evaluations Window 1 Spectrum Graph Window 2 Carrier P
472. urns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 171 See Marker Type on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Analyzing GSM Measurements Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace 1to4 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 172 General Marker Settings The following commands define general settings for all markers ESI EM 286 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 173 Marker Positioning Settings The following commands ar
473. ursted signals BURSt Search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Note For Burst no demodulation measurements e g Modula tion Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modula tion Spectrum Transient Spectrum measurements are sup ported NONE Do not synchronize at all If an external or power trigger is chosen the trigger instant corresponds to the frame start Tip Manually adjust the trigger offset to move the burst to be analyzed under the mask in the Power vs Time measurement Note For None no demodulation measurements e g Modu lation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modu lation Spectrum Transient Spectrum measurements are sup ported RST ALL Example CONF SYNC MODE TSC Manual operation See Synchronization on page 129 CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY State If activated only results from frames slots where the Slot to measure was found are displayed and taken into account in the averaging of the results The behavior of this function depends on the value of the Synchronization parameter see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 254 Parameters for setting and query State ON OFF RST ON Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example CONF SYNC MODE TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration CONF SYNC ONLY ON Only if the
474. use by the same base station There may be multiple instances of subblocks within an RF bandwidth A gap is defined as A frequency gap between two consecutive sub blocks within an RF bandwidth where the RF requirements in the gap are based on co existence for un coordinated operation Level subblock subblock subblock with 3 with 4 with 3 Carriers carriers Carriers Fig 5 20 Non contiguous carrier allocation R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements _ M X P ri eee av Non contiguous carrier allocation The R amp S FSW GSM application now allows you to measure such non contiguous car rier setups containing up to 16 carriers and a single gap two subblocks The position of the individual carriers is defined as absolute frequency values In addition the posi tion of the gap between the GSM subblocks is defined explicitely by the number of the carrier after which it begins The burst type and modulation can be defined individually for each carrier to reflect different GSM configurations Limit checks for non contiguous carrier allocation In order to perform useful limit checks for such non contiguous carrier allocation the limit lines are automatically adapted to the gap so that other signals do not distort the GSM limit check 5 15 3 Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Measurements For MCWN measurements re
475. used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 199 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IO Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IOQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum
476. v E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 9 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform common GSM measurements with the R amp S FSW GSM application 9 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 181 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 182 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Gionals eese 184 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals eeseeeee 185 How to Measure Wideband Noise in Multicarrier Geiupes 187 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Sig nals 1 2 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst wi
477. vel offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 234 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set fo
478. ving Results Measured value pair I Q for each sample that has been recor ded The data format depends on FORMat DATA Default unit V Preset the instrument RST Enter GSM option INST SEL GSM Set center frequency to 935 MHz FREQ CENT 935MHZ Sample Rate 6 5 MHz TRAC IQ SRAT 6 5MHz Capture Time 100 ms SET SWE TIME 0 1 s Set statistic count to 1 to obtain the I Q data of a single cap ture Otherwise several captures are performed until the set II statistic count is reached VQ data is returned from the last capture SWE COUN 1 JI Switch to single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Start measurement and wait for sync This performs one sweep or a single UO capture INIT WAI JI Determine output format binary float32 FORMat REAL 32 Read UO data of the entire capture buffer 653751 samples are returned as l Q I Q I 653751 4 Bytes float32 2 I Q 5230008 bytes TRAC IQ DATA MEM Read 2048 UO samples starting at the beginning of data acqui sition TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 2048 Read 1024 UO samples starting at sample 2048 TRAC 1IQ DATA MEM 2048 1024 See chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 Query only Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n
479. w on page 275 Results FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts OUTer ALL on page 335 Inner Narrow Band Table Similar to the Outer Narrowband Table however the measured distortion products in the gap between the GSM carrier blocks are displayed for non contiguous carrier allo cation The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Offsets are lower than 1 8 MHz 400 KHz 600 KHz 1200 KHz The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute measurement frequency For contiguous carrier allocation or if narrowband noise measurement is disabled this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH INAR See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 Results FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL on page 336 Outer Narrowband Table Displays the measured distortion products for the frequencies outside of the subblocks but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier allocation The measurement is gated according to the standard 50 to 90 96 of the useful part of the time slot excluding the mid amble in the outermost carriers If no bursts are found a warning is issued in the status bar and the measurement results are not valid The limits are calculated by cumulating the individual limit lines of each active carrier Frequencies falling onto theoretical intermodulation products receive an extra relaxa tion R am
480. which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 116 11 5 5 Data Acquisition You must define how much and how often data is captured from the input signal 0 11 5 5 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 and the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual LEE D ta TE e 245 e Configuring and Performing Sweeps eese inneren tnt 247 Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how long data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application SNO SUPR caede patrc aita rac adr pa drea tas 245 SENSe SWE ep TIME c esesessecscseseesceesecscessscssecsscevansesevansesecsvevstsavensseasateteesaeevansesead 245 SENSE ISWEer TIME AUTO miter eR e nade vaten con EAE va rtedeaeenen dete 246 TRACIO SRAT y cm 246 TRACGTQUBUIDE 22 1 2 2 122120222004 a Oee Peste o cien aseo ea boves ee EP Proc DEP RPIR hed a nai 247 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not
481. wing commandas are required to configure the markers CAL Gulate mne DELETamarkerem zADFE 2 1 eene irre dirt sete oc endende sehn 284 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe eee eeeeseeeeeei eese nnne nnne nnn ah nnn na a 285 CALCulate nz DEL Tamarkercmz TR ACe 285 E e E EE RR KE 285 CAL Culate lt n MARK EE 285 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz TR ACe 286 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event Analyzing GSM Measurements CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 171 See Marker Type on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command t
482. ws on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 278 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 7 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel LAY GUPEABIDEVMVINDOWIT cec tnu eene tete ege eo et E o Mae ex rete Ruta 275 LAY cut GA EE ele EE 277 LAYGutIDENUF MWINDOW E 277 Analyzing GSM Measurements LAY ouEREMover WINDOW nicer auda ce trt tere aee rede Fave nep Pn ere eaae tana do ques 278 LAYouEREPLace lee EE 278 PAV OMS EE 278 LAY out WINBDOWSmIesjAD Dd ae ele vea deinde a ak edad epe exa RN educ iar edd 280 LAYO WINDOW SAS IDENY Zinn 1 2 2 tirare IIoc ebore ete uae ENER 280 LAY out WINDOW A REMONWG 12 ZEN ance eem ied penna doe pea xo da pan SNR Re DAR RR RR RR IRE RR dd 281 LAvoutWlNDow cnz RED ace iooni ainni ara inaa anaia anaa anpa Ena anaidai aE aE 281 LAYOUVINDOWw A gt T
483. xceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 119 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 119 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDoff Time This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command is available for any trigger source not just RF Power Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 238 command for new remote control programs Parameters Time Default unit S TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising
484. xis is adap ted to the measured values and then fixed to that range Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH TGSG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 275 DISPlay WINDow TRACel MODE WRITe for Histogram see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 282 DISPlay WINDow TRACe2 MODE PDFavg for PDF of average see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 282 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 297 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 297 User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 33 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Trigger to Sync Table The Trigger to Sync measurement determines the time between an external trigger event and the start of the first symbol of the TSC The start of the first symbol of the TSC corresponds to the time 0 of the symbol period see chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 60 Only one result per data capture is provided Therefore it is useful to perform several data captures and average the results to obtain an accurate value see Statistic Count on page 124 Both graphical and numeric table results are available While the graphical results are mainly used to determine the required measurement settings see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 the numeric results provide the actual trigger to sync value including statistical evaluation 2 Trigger to Sync Table Current Average Std Dev Trigger to Sync us 2 005 E 0006 2 225 0 00042
485. y OSUPpress CURRENH csccccceeeseneeceeesesecaeseneseseaderereeaneee 312 READ BURSIt MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimum esses 312 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpnress GDEViatlon ennenen erete rorererererernrnene nnn 312 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlbERGentie EVM nene 312 REABD BURSI MACCuracy PERCentileJE VM 1 eaaet deter ti neenon age 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROTI a eeecisc eiiis see nna n ate nnu aaa 313 READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr essere nnne 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile PERROTF cesis krii naeh nana anth trien 313 READ BURG MAC CuracvlbtRCG ene PERRO enean 313 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlbPERbRor PDEAK AVERage erer trerererererersrsrernnne 313 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlbERbRor PDEAkK CLUpRbent 313 FETCHBURGOC MAC CuracvlPERbRor PEAK MAximum nenne 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation eeeeeeesceseeeeeen 313 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb or DEAkK AVEhRage nennen 313 READ BURStEMACCu racy PERRor PEAK CURREN eene 313 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum essct 313 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtbRbor PDEAkK GDEMiatlon eene 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage isses 314 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent esses 314 FETCh BURStH MACCuracy PERRor RMG MANImum eren 314 FETCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERbRor RMG GDtEViaton rere rer
486. y i3 io edere a 40 43 Output Configuration usssse 101 114 145 153 Configuration remote ssssssss 218 231 Noise source e Selllligs 52 a eet oa tbe ve eic nadine TWIG QO Duct o rcr nd totae Overload RF inp t remote EE 219 Overview Belt le ie ul EE 88 Configuration MCOWN E 140 P Parameters Intermodulatior soisissa outta all t ere 39 Modulation Accuracy 22 25 28 Narrowband noise enr rre 42 Transient spectrum 2592 Wideband nolse rentre 44 PCL itunes w OLO POF rensas P 378 Peak search ROY 173 Peaks Absolute Marker positioning a c RM Performance IMPrOVINO Roe n 189 Performing GSM measurement MCWN measurement Phase Error Evaluation method cete teens 26 Results remote eite 300 Power Class eere 92 94 112 143 151 206 Class TT EE 139 Reference PVT ies retenues d 54 Reference Transient Spectrum 24 135 vs slot evaluation Method iiissrnsiiniiririisd 27 vs slot results remote au AR VSititme See PVT WEE 28 Power sensors Trigger mode E 119 Power vs Time libn Check uendere ettet aes 70 Preamplifier Setting 114 153 Softkey 114 153 Presetting Channels 90 141 Default values tege netten 139 Bre c nE 170 uge Te e 120 159 Probes NUIT ro o V ufo
487. z Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 176 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off User Manual 1173 9263 02 11 293 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements WEEN Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 176 See Restore Original Display on page 176 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 176 11 7 4 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese eene 294 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple z0oomzGTATe nenene 294 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2
488. zer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 11 Digital UO Output FIFO Overload This bit is set if an overload of the Digital UO Output FIFO occurred This happens if the output data rate is higher than the maximal data rate of the connected instrument Reduce the sample rate to solve the problem 12 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDIEOR 2 cr pterea ornatu ENEE EENS 349 STATUs QUEStionable DIQ ENABIle 222 tain rotae Ran EENNNENEN REENEN NENNEN 349 e E euer ll e NEE EE 350 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition eese nnne nnn nne 350 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENIt esses nenne rere rh nr nnns 350 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ COND Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in
489. zero forcing filter and a symbol wise decision method This method is recommended for high symbol to noise ratios but not for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse The inverse fil ter colors the noise inside the signal bandwidth and therefore is not recommended for narrow band signals or signals with a low signal to noise ratio Peaks in the EVM vs Time measurement see EVM on page 18 may occur if the Linear symbol deci sion algorithm fails In that case use the Sequence method Linear is the fastest option SEQuence Symbol decision via sequence estimation This method uses an algorithm that minimizes the symbol errors of the entire burst It requires that the tail bits in the analyzed signal are correct It has a better performance lower symbol error rate compared to the Linear method especially at low signal to noise ratios but with a loss of measurement speed This method is recommended for normal bursts with 16QAM or 32QAM modulation and for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse RST AUTO Example Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 364 or chap ter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Sig nal on page 368 Manual operation See Symbol Decision on page 130 CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits lt Value gt The demodulator

R&S FSW GSM Application User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW GSM Application User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW GSM Application User Manual